U.S. patent application number 13/274780 was filed with the patent office on 2012-05-10 for gaming machine capable of broadcasting a status of a game by a reel action.
This patent application is currently assigned to ARUZE GAMING AMERICA, INC.. Invention is credited to Masumi FUJISAWA, Takehisa ITAGAKI, Kenta KITAMURA.
Application Number | 20120115568 13/274780 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 46020118 |
Filed Date | 2012-05-10 |
United States Patent
Application |
20120115568 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
FUJISAWA; Masumi ; et
al. |
May 10, 2012 |
GAMING MACHINE CAPABLE OF BROADCASTING A STATUS OF A GAME BY A REEL
ACTION
Abstract
The present invention provides a gaming machine that is capable
of prompting a player to concentrate his or her consciousness to a
unit game that attracts the player's interest by performing
rendering when a li-zhi has been established, the gaming machine
beings capable of visually recognizing by the player an outcome of
symbols without keeping off his or her eye from moving symbols. The
gaming machine is configured to display symbols associated with at
least one scroll line in a second mode that is different from a
first mode from among scroll lines corresponding to the moving
symbols as triggered by the fact that a li-zhi has been established
by means of symbols displayed in a stopped state.
Inventors: |
FUJISAWA; Masumi; (Tokyo,
JP) ; KITAMURA; Kenta; (Tokyo, JP) ; ITAGAKI;
Takehisa; (Tokyo, JP) |
Assignee: |
ARUZE GAMING AMERICA, INC.
Las Vegas
NV
UNIVERSAL ENTERTAINMENT CORPORATION
Tokyo
|
Family ID: |
46020118 |
Appl. No.: |
13/274780 |
Filed: |
October 17, 2011 |
Current U.S.
Class: |
463/20 |
Current CPC
Class: |
G07F 17/34 20130101;
G07F 17/3213 20130101 |
Class at
Publication: |
463/20 |
International
Class: |
A63F 9/24 20060101
A63F009/24 |
Foreign Application Data
Date |
Code |
Application Number |
Nov 5, 2010 |
JP |
2010-249171 |
Claims
1. A gaming machine for executing a unit game in which a prize is
determined based on rearranged symbols, said gaming machine
comprising: a display having a display region configured to display
symbols associated with each of a plurality of scroll lines; and a
controller for controlling a unit game in which the symbols
associated with the scroll line are moved and then rearranged in
the display region, the controller programmed to execute processing
operations of: (1-1-1) randomly determining symbols to be
rearranged; (1-1-2) displaying the symbols associated with the
scroll line in the display region so as to move in a first mode
along the scroll line; (1-1-3) stopping the symbols associated with
at least one scroll line from among the plurality of scroll lines
and then displaying the stopped symbols in the display region;
(1-1-4) as triggered by a fact that a li-zhi has been established
by the symbols displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the
processing operation (1-1-3), displaying symbols associated with at
least one scroll line from among scroll lines corresponding to
moving symbols so as to move in a second mode that is different
from the first mode; and (1-1-5) automatically stopping the symbols
associated with at least one scroll line from among the plurality
of scroll lines and then rearranging the symbols determined in
accordance with the processing operation (1-1-1).
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the processing
operation of (1-1-4) includes processing operations of: (1-2-1)
determining whether or not a li-zhi has been established by means
of symbols having been displayed in a stopped state every time the
symbols associated with one scroll lines from among the plurality
of scroll lines are stopped; (1-2-2) displaying in the display
region the symbols associated with a scroll line on which symbols
are moving, from among the plurality of scroll lines, so as to move
in the second mode; and (1-2-3) invoking and executing the
processing operation of (1-2-2) when it is determined that the
li-zhi has been established in accordance with the processing
operation of (1-2-1).
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second mode
includes a plurality of post-li-zhi modes for defining a symbol
movement mode after a li-zhi has been established, and the
processing operation of (1-2-3) includes a processing operation of
(1-3-1) determining as the second mode one post-li-zhi mode that is
randomly selected from the plurality of post-li-zhi modes.
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the processing
operation of displaying symbols so as to move in the second mode
includes processing operations of (1-4-1) displaying the symbols in
the display region to move by a predetermined distance; (1-4-2)
subsequent to the processing operation of (1-4-1), stopping the
symbols for a predetermined period of time and then displaying the
stopped symbols in the display region; (1-4-3) executing the
processing operations of (1-4-1) and (1-4-2) at least once; and
(1-4-4) after the processing operation of (1-4-3), stopping the
determined symbols in the processing operation of (1-1-1) and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region.
5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the processing
operation of displaying symbols so as to move in the second mode
includes processing operations of: (1-5-1) stopping the symbols and
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region; (1-5-2)
displaying the symbols in the display region so as to move in a
mode similar to the first mode; (1-5-3) executing the processing
operations of (1-5-1) and (1-5-2) at least once; and (1-5-4) after
the processing operation of (1-5-3) has been executed, stopping the
determined symbols in accordance with the processing operation of
(1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the display
region.
6. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the processing
operation of displaying symbols so as to move in the second mode
includes processing operations of: (1-6-1) displaying the symbols
in the display region so as to move by a predetermined distance;
(1-6-2) subsequent to the processing operation of (1-6-1), stopping
the symbols for a predetermined period of time and then displaying
the stopped symbols in the display region; (1-6-3) executing the
processing operations of (1-6-1) and (1-6-2) at least once; (1-6-4)
displaying the symbols in the display region so as to move in a
mode similar to the first mode; (1-6-5) executing the processing
operations of (1-6-1) to (1-6-4) at least once; and (1-6-6) after
the processing operation of (1-6-5) has been executed, stopping the
determined symbols in the processing operation of (1-1-1) and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region.
7. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the processing
operation of displaying symbols so as to move in the second mode
includes processing operations of: (1-7-1) stopping the symbols and
then displaying the stopped symbols in the display region; (1-7-2)
displaying the symbols in the display region so as to move in a
mode similar to the first mode; (1-7-3) displaying the symbols in
the display region so as to move in a direction that is different
from the one in the first mode; (1-7-4) displaying the symbols in
the display region so as to move at a speed that is different from
the one in the first mode; (1-7-5) after the processing operation
of (1-7-1) has been executed, executing any of the processing
operations (1-7-2) to (1-7-4); (1-7-6) executing the processing
operation of (1-7-5) at least once; and (1-7-7) after the
processing operation of (1-7-6) has been executed, stopping the
determined symbols in the processing operation of (1-1-1) and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region.
8. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the processing
operation of displaying symbols so as to move in the second mode
includes processing operations of: (1-8-1) displaying in the
display region a predetermined symbol from among symbols associated
with a first scroll line from among a plurality of scroll lines on
which symbols are moving and a symbol associated with the
predetermined symbol from among symbols associated with a second
scroll line that is different from the first scroll line from among
a plurality of scroll lines on which symbols are moving, so as to
move in parallel to each other; (1-8-2) after the processing
operations of (1-8-1) has been executed, displaying the
predetermined symbol and the symbol associated with the
predetermined symbol so as to move at a speed that is different
from a speed in the first mode; and (1-8-3) after the processing
operation of (1-8-2) has been executed, stopping the determined
symbols in the processing operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying
the stopped symbols in the display region.
9. A gaming machine for executing a unit game in which a prize is
determined based on rearranged symbols, said gaming machine
comprising: a display having a display region configured to display
symbols associated with each of a plurality of scroll lines; a
backlight configured to illuminate the display; a spin button that
can be operated by a player, for outputting an operating signal
indicating that an operation has been made when the spin button has
been operated by the player; an indicator configured to display a
degree of expectation indicating a possibility that the unit game
is advantageous; and a controller for controlling the indicator
based on the fact that the operating signal has been received, the
controller being programmed to execute processing operations of:
(1-9-1) turning off the backlight as triggered by the fact that the
operating signal has been received; (1-9-2) generating the degree
of expectation from a progress of the unit game as triggered by the
fact that the operating signal has been received; and (1-9-3)
transmitting to the indicator a control signal adapted to control
the indicator in accordance with the degree of expectation.
Description
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims priority of Japanese Patent
Application No. 2010-249171 filed on Nov. 5, 2010. The contents of
this application are incorporated herein by reference in their
entirety.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0002] 1. Field of the Invention
[0003] The present invention relates to a gaming machine that is
capable of broadcasting a status of a game to a player by means of
a reel action.
[0004] 2. Description of the Related Art
[0005] Conventionally, in gaming machines, games to be played by
displaying symbols have been performed. Specifically, a unit game
is repeatedly performed in such a manner that a plurality of
symbols are displayed after movably displayed during a
predetermined period of time and then a predetermined prize is
awarded to a winning player, in accordance with a combination or
the number of symbols having been rearranged. A player repeatedly
performs a unit game in such a manner that movement of symbols are
started and then predetermined symbols are rearranged, and a prize
is determined, while expecting that such a prize may be
obtained.
[0006] As described above, in gaming machines, a predetermined
prize according to a combination or the number of symbols having
been rearranged is awarded to a winning player. For example,
symbols are rearranged, whereby if a combination of predetermined
symbols is arranged along a winning line, it is determined that a
winning prize has been established and then a predetermined prize
is awarded to a winning player. However, if a combination or the
number of symbols having been rearranged is the same and is not
arranged along a winning line, it is not determined that a winning
prize has been established and then a predetermined prize is not
awarded to a player. In this way, in order to clearly show a player
as to whether or not a winning prize has been established, there is
a need to clearly display a winning line as well as the rearranged
symbols.
[0007] As described above, a winning prize depends on a winning
line as well as a combination or the number of symbols having been
rearranged. Thus, in order to increase a winning possibility, there
has been a gaming machine in which a number of winning lines are
provided. For example, among the conventional gaming machines,
there have existed the ones in which there are several hundreds of
winning lines as well. While a winning possibility can be increased
by increasing the number of winning lines, there has occurred
apprehension that the progress of a game is hardly visually
recognizable to players because the number of winning lines is too
large. For example, it has been difficult to determine the progress
of a game such as whether or not a current situation becomes far
away from a winning prize or becomes close to a winning prize or
which winning line is the closest to a winning prize on the way of
a unit game. In addition, the number of winning lines is increased,
and thus, it has also been difficult to recognize the fact that a
winning prize has been established as well as the progress of a
game. Therefore, there has existed a gaming machine in which
rendering is provided so as to display a winning line on which a
prize has been obtained in a highlighting manner (for example,
refer to International Publication No. WO 99/64997).
[0008] Among the gaming machines having a number of winning lines,
there has existed a gaming machine in which when symbols associated
with a winning prize has been displayed in a stopped state, the
symbols are displayed in a highlighting manner, for example, the
symbols are displayed in red. In such gaming machines, if symbols
associated with a winning prize are sequentially displayed in a
stopped state, the number of symbols displayed in a highlighting
manner gradually increases; and therefore, such a situation has
been unrecognizable for players as a result. In consideration of
such a circumstance, symbols associated with a winning prize have
been displayed at a position other than a winning line only in a
case of a predetermined progress, for example, when a li-zhi has
been established (for example, refer to United States Patent
Application Publication No. 2008/0090639).
[0009] The gaming machine described in the abovementioned
International Publication No. WO 99/64997 enables a player to
recognize a winning line indicating that when a prize has occurred,
a prize has been established at the same time as the occurrence of
the prize. However, it has not been possible to eliminate the fact
that a player misses a reel action which enhances a sense of
expectation as to where or not a prize is established while symbols
are rearranged after rotation reels have been stopped.
[0010] In a gaming machine, for example, in a slot machine, a unit
game is performed in such a manner that a player operates a spin
button, whereby movement of symbols is started and then the symbols
are stopped and rearranged. In this way, in the unit game,
operation of the spin button, movement of symbols, and
rearrangement of symbols are repeatedly performed in the same
manner every time; and therefore, there has been a possibility that
a comparatively monotonous game is played. Thus, a player loses a
tense atmosphere or a concentration for a game if he or she plays
the game for a long period of time, and there has been likely to be
established a situation that he or she misses a symbol display
region while seeing it.
[0011] In addition, the gaming machine described in United States
Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0090639 is provided in such
a manner that in a case of a predetermined progress of a game, for
example, a li-zhi has been reached, symbols associated with a
winning prize is displayed at a position other than a winning line.
However, the symbols associated with a winning prize is displayed
at a position other than a winning line; and therefore, a player
needs to move his or her eye from the winning line to such another
position in order to check symbols, and the player has been forced
to move his or her eye from moving symbols. Accordingly, there has
also occurred a situation that a player cannot see the moving
symbols sufficiently.
[0012] The present invention has been made in view of the
circumstance described above, and it is an object of the present
invention to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing
rendering when a li-zhi has been established to thereby prompt a
player to concentrate his or her consciousness to a unit game that
attracts the player's interest and then visually recognize an
outcome of symbols without moving a player's eye from moving
symbols.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0013] A gaming machine according to aspect of present invention
for executing a unit game in which a prize is determined based on
rearranged symbols, said gaming machine comprising:
[0014] a display having a display region configured to display
symbols associated with each of a plurality of scroll lines;
and
[0015] a controller for controlling a unit game in which the
symbols associated with the scroll line are moved and then
rearranged in the display region,
[0016] the controller programmed to execute processing operations
of: (1-1-1) randomly determining rearranged symbols;
[0017] (1-1-2) displaying the symbols associated with the scroll
line in the display region so as to move in a first mode along the
scroll line;
[0018] (1-1-3) stopping the symbols associated with at least one
scroll line from among the plurality of scroll lines and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region;
[0019] (1-1-4) as triggered by a fact that a li-zhi has been
established by the symbols displayed in a stopped state in
accordance with the processing operation (1-1-3), displaying
symbols associated with at least one scroll line from among scroll
lines corresponding to moving symbols so as to move in a second
mode that is different from the first mode; and
[0020] (1-1-5) automatically stopping the symbols associated with
at least one scroll line from among the plurality of scroll lines
and then rearranging the symbols determined in accordance with the
processing operation (1-1-1).
[0021] Symbols are displayed so as to move in a second aspect that
is different from a first aspect, as triggered by the fact that a
li-zhi has been established to thus able to prompt a player to
concentrate his or her consciousness to a unit game that attracts
the player's interest.
[0022] The gaming machine according to aspect of the present
invention, wherein
[0023] the processing operation of (1-1-4) includes processing
operations of:
[0024] (1-2-1) determining whether or not a li-zhi has been
established by means of symbols having been displayed in a stopped
state every time the symbols associated with one scroll lines from
among the plurality of scroll lines are stopped;
[0025] (1-2-2) displaying in the display region the symbols
associated with a scroll line on which symbols are moving, from
among the plurality of scroll lines, so as to move in the second
mode; and
[0026] (1-2-3) executing the processing operation of (1-2-2) when
it is determined that the li-zhi has been established in accordance
with the processing operation of (1-2-1).
[0027] It is determined whether or not a li-zhi has been
established every time symbols stop, and in a case where the li-zhi
has been established, a processing operation of displaying symbols
so as to move in a second aspect is invoked and executed.
Therefore, only in a case where the li-zhi has been actually
reached, the processing operation of displaying symbols so as to
move in the second aspect is invoked and executed to thus able to
determine and execute a processing operation that is suitably
preferable, in accordance with the progress of a game.
[0028] The gaming machine according to the aspect of the present
invention, wherein
[0029] the second mode includes a plurality of post-li-zhi modes
for defining a symbol movement mode after a li-zhi has been
established, and
[0030] the processing operation of (1-2-3) includes a processing
operation of (1-3-1) determining as the second mode one post-li-zhi
mode that is randomly selected from the plurality of post-li-zhi
modes.
[0031] By doing this, one post-li-zhi aspect that is preferable can
be selected and executed in accordance with the progress of a
game.
[0032] The gaming machine according to the aspect of the present
invention, wherein
[0033] the processing operation of displaying symbols so as to move
in the second mode includes processing operations of:
[0034] (1-4-1) displaying the symbols in the display region to move
by a predetermined distance;
[0035] (1-4-2) subsequent to the processing operation of (1-4-1),
stopping the symbols for a predetermined period of time and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region;
[0036] (1-4-3) executing the processing operations of (1-4-1) and
(1-4-2) at least once; and
[0037] (1-4-4) subsequent to the processing operation of (1-4-3),
stopping the determined symbols in the processing operation of
(1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the display
region.
[0038] The gaming machine according to the aspect of the present
invention, wherein
[0039] the processing operation of displaying symbols so as to move
in the second mode includes processing operations of:
[0040] (1-5-1) stopping the symbols and displaying the stopped
symbols in the display region;
[0041] (1-5-2) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a mode similar to the first mode;
[0042] (1-5-3) executing the processing operations of (1-5-1) and
(1-5-2) at least once; and
[0043] (1-5-4) after the processing operation of (1-5-3) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in accordance with the
processing operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped
symbols in the display region.
[0044] The gaming machine according to the aspect of the present
invention, wherein
[0045] the processing operation of displaying symbols so as to move
in the second mode includes processing operations of:
[0046] (1-6-1) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move by a predetermined distance;
[0047] (1-6-2) subsequent to the processing operation of (1-6-1),
stopping the symbols for a predetermined period of time and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region;
[0048] (1-6-3) executing the processing operations of (1-6-1) and
(1-6-2) at least once;
[0049] (1-6-4) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a mode similar to the first mode;
[0050] (1-6-5) executing the processing operations of (1-6-1) to
(1-6-4) at least once; and
[0051] (1-6-6) after the processing operation of (1-6-5) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in the processing
operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the
display region.
[0052] The gaming machine according to the aspect of the present
invention, wherein
[0053] the processing operation of displaying symbols so as to move
in the second mode includes processing operations of:
[0054] (1-7-1) stopping the symbols and then displaying the stopped
symbols in the display region;
[0055] (1-7-2) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a mode similar to the first mode;
[0056] (1-7-3) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a direction that is different from the one in the first
mode;
[0057] (1-7-4) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move at a speed that is different from the one in the first
mode;
[0058] (1-7-5) after the processing operation of (1-7-1) has been
executed, executing any of the processing operations (1-7-2) to
(1-7-4);
[0059] (1-7-6) executing the processing operation of (1-7-5) at
least once; and
[0060] (1-7-7) after the processing operation of (1-7-6) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in the processing
operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the
display region.
[0061] The gaming machine according to the aspect of the present
invention, wherein
[0062] the processing operation of displaying symbols so as to move
in the second mode includes processing operations of:
[0063] (1-8-1) displaying in the display region a predetermined
symbol from among symbols associated with a first scroll line from
among a plurality of scroll lines on which symbols are moving and a
symbol associated with the predetermined symbol from among symbols
associated with a second scroll that is different from the first
scroll line from among a plurality of scroll lines on symbols are
moving in parallel to each other;
[0064] (1-8-2) after the processing operations of (1-8-1) has been
executed, displaying the predetermined symbol and the symbol
associated with the predetermined symbol so as to move at a speed
that is different from a speed in the first mode; and
[0065] (1-8-3) after the processing operation of (1-8-2) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in the processing
operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the
display region.
[0066] A gaming machine according to aspect of present invention
for executing a unit game in which a prize is determined based on
rearranged symbols, said gaming machine comprising:
[0067] a display having a display region configured to display
symbols associated with each of a plurality of scroll lines;
[0068] a backlight configured to illuminate the display;
[0069] a spin button that can be operated by a player, for
outputting an operating signal indicating that an operation has
been made when the spin button has been operated by the player;
[0070] an indicator configured to display a degree of expectation
indicating a possibility that the unit game is advantageous;
and
[0071] a controller for controlling the indicator based on the fact
that the operating signal has been received, the controller being
programmed to execute processing operations of:
[0072] (1-9-1) turning off the backlight as triggered by the fact
that the operating signal has been received;
[0073] (1-9-2) generating the degree of expectation from a progress
of the unit game as triggered by the fact that the operating signal
has been received; and
[0074] (1-9-3) transmitting to the indicator a control signal
adapted to control the indicator in accordance with the degree of
expectation.
[0075] A degree of expectation for a winning prize can be indicated
for a player by means of an indicator, as triggered by the fact
that an operating signal has been received, and a player's interest
can be enhanced from the start of a unit game.
[0076] A player can be prompted to concentrate his or her
consciousness to a unit game that attracts his or her interest by
performing rendering when a li-zhi has been established, and an
outcome of symbols can be visually recognized without moving the
player's eye from moving symbols.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0077] FIG. 1 is an explanatory view showing a reel setting method
in a gaming machine;
[0078] FIG. 2 is an explanatory view showing a functional flow of
the gaming machine;
[0079] FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a functional flow of a game in
a gaming machine according to the embodiment;
[0080] FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing an entire gaming
machine;
[0081] FIG. 5 is a block diagram of a gaming system;
[0082] FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a PTS system;
[0083] FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a slot machine in a gaming
machine;
[0084] FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing a button layout of a
control panel;
[0085] FIG. 9 is an enlarged perspective view of a PTS
terminal;
[0086] FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a reel device;
[0087] FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the reel
device;
[0088] FIG. 12 is a perspective view of a reel unit retaining
mechanism;
[0089] FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the reel unit retaining
mechanism;
[0090] FIG. 14 is a perspective view of a second connector;
[0091] FIG. 15 is a perspective view of a slide retaining
mechanism;
[0092] FIG. 16 is a rear view of the reel device;
[0093] FIG. 17 is a front view of the reel device;
[0094] FIG. 18 is a side view of the reel device;
[0095] FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a reel support
mechanism;
[0096] FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the reel support
mechanism;
[0097] FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the reel support mechanism
and a rendering light emitting device;
[0098] FIG. 22 is a side view of the reel device;
[0099] FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a reel drive mechanism;
[0100] FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the reel drive
mechanism;
[0101] FIG. 25 is a perspective view of a blade mechanism and a
driving force transmission mechanism;
[0102] FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the blade mechanism and the
driving force transmission mechanism;
[0103] FIG. 27 is a perspective view of reels;
[0104] FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the reels;
[0105] FIG. 29 is a perspective view of a reel frame member;
[0106] FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the reel frame member and a
reel band;
[0107] FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the reel frame member and a
backlight device;
[0108] FIG. 32 is a front view of the reel frame member and the
backlight device;
[0109] FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the backlight device;
[0110] FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the backlight device;
[0111] FIG. 35 is a perspective view of a backlight board case;
[0112] FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the rendering light
emitting device;
[0113] FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the rendering light
emitting device;
[0114] FIG. 38 is an electrical block diagram of a slot
machine;
[0115] FIG. 39 is an electrical block diagram of a reel board;
[0116] FIG. 40 is an electrical block diagram of a PTS
terminal;
[0117] FIG. 41 is an electrical block diagram of an IC card;
[0118] FIG. 42 is an explanatory view of a data table indicating
symbols and code numbers of the respective symbols;
[0119] FIG. 43 is an explanatory view of a data table of a prize
management table;
[0120] FIG. 44 is an explanatory view of a data table of a
number-of-free-games table;
[0121] FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing a relationship
between a reel setting table and a magnetic force detection value
table;
[0122] FIG. 46 is a flowchart of startup processing;
[0123] FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a part of basic game
processing;
[0124] FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a part of the basic game
processing;
[0125] FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing bonus game processing to be
invoked and executed in step S15 of FIG. 48;
[0126] FIG. 50 is a flowchart of common game processing;
[0127] FIG. 51 is a flowchart of first reel setting processing;
[0128] FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing a reel setting method
in a gaming machine;
[0129] FIG. 53 is an explanatory view showing a functional flow of
the gaming machine;
[0130] FIG. 54 is an electrical block diagram of a reel board;
[0131] FIG. 55 is an explanatory view of a reel setting table;
[0132] FIG. 56 is a flowchart of second reel setting
processing;
[0133] FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing the reel setting
method in the gaming machine;
[0134] FIG. 58 is a flowchart of check pulse value acquisition
processing;
[0135] FIG. 59 is a flowchart of third reel setting processing;
[0136] FIG. 60 is an explanatory view of an illumination mode
setting table;
[0137] FIG. 61 is an explanatory view of backlight luminance
adjustment;
[0138] FIG. 62 is a flowchart of backlight luminance adjustment
processing;
[0139] FIG. 63 is an explanatory view of pay line display;
[0140] FIG. 64 is an explanatory view of pay line rendering;
[0141] FIG. 65 is a view showing a schematic configuration of a
gaming machine according to a third embodiment;
[0142] FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of reel rotation
start processing to be invoked and executed in step S9 of FIG. 47
described above;
[0143] FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of reel rotation
stop processing to be invoked and executed in step S11 of FIG. 47
described above;
[0144] FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of first display
control processing;
[0145] FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of second
display control processing;
[0146] FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of third display
control processing;
[0147] FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of fourth
display control processing;
[0148] FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of fifth display
control processing;
[0149] FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of sixth display
control processing;
[0150] FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of seventh
display control processing;
[0151] FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of eighth
display control processing;
[0152] FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of ninth display
control processing;
[0153] FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of tenth display
control processing;
[0154] FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of continual of
the tenth display control processing;
[0155] FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of eleventh
display control processing;
[0156] FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of twelfth
display control processing;
[0157] FIG. 81 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the first display control processing;
[0158] FIG. 82 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the second display control processing;
[0159] FIG. 83 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the third display control processing;
[0160] FIG. 84 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the fourth display control processing;
[0161] FIG. 85 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the fifth display control processing;
[0162] FIG. 86 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the sixth display control processing;
[0163] FIG. 87 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the seventh display control processing;
[0164] FIG. 88 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the eighth display control processing;
[0165] FIG. 89 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the ninth display control processing;
[0166] FIG. 90 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the tenth display control processing;
[0167] FIG. 91 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the eleventh display control processing;
[0168] FIG. 92 is a view showing an example of movement of reels in
the twelfth display control processing; and
[0169] FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a subroutine indicating
processing of expectation value meter lighting control.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
First Embodiment
[0170] (Outline of Gaming Machine)
[0171] A gaming machine according to a first embodiment, as shown
in FIG. 1 has a slot machine 10 to be played by rearranging a
symbol 501 based on a magnetic force in an external magnetic field
that varies by means of rotation of a reel M3. While, in the
following description, gaming machines are explained using a device
type of a plurality of slot machines 10 in which a plurality of
players participate, slot machines 10 to be played by single
players itself may be provided.
[0172] A slot machine 10 is provided with a reel device M1 in which
a magnetic force in an external magnetic field that varies by means
of rotation of the reel M3 and an arrangement position of the
symbol 501 are associated with each other, thereby enabling
rearrangement of the symbol 501 with the use of only the magnetic
force in the external magnetic field that varies due to rotation of
the reel M3.
[0173] In a specific description, a slot machine 10 has a reel
device M1 provided with a reel M3 and a reel control portion 631 of
FIG. 2 for controlling the reel device M1. The reel device M1 has:
a reel M3 having symbols 501 arranged on an outer circumferential
face; a reel drive mechanism M5 for rearranging the symbols 501 by
driving the reel M3 in a rotating manner; a magnet M201 that is
provided in the reel drive mechanism M5 so as to change an external
magnetic field by rotation of the reel M3; a magnetic force
detection mechanism M202 for detecting a magnetic force in the
external magnetic field to thereby output a magnetic force
detection signal; and a reel setting means (a reel setting portion
632 of FIG. 2) for associating a magnetic force detection signal
and an arrangement position of the symbol 501 with each other.
[0174] In addition, a reel control portion 631 of FIG. 2 has, as a
reel drive control means, a function of controlling the reel drive
mechanism M5 so as to rearrange the symbols 501 in a predetermined
rearrangement state, based on a magnetic force detection signal and
the rearrangement position of the symbol 501.
[0175] In this manner, the stop machine 10 is capable of indirectly
detecting the arrangement position of the symbols 501, based on the
magnetic force detection signal even if the arrangement position of
the symbols 501 is not directly detected by means of a sensor or
the like by the fact that the magnetic force detection signal that
is obtained by detecting the magnetic force in the external
magnetic field that varies by means of rotation of the reel M3 and
the arrangement position of the symbols 501 are associated with
each other. In this manner, even if a positional relationship
between the symbol 501 and the reel M3 is not preset, the symbol
501 having arranged on the reel M3 can be specified; and therefore,
the symbol 501 can be rearranged in a predetermined arrangement
state. As a result, in a case of performing a work of arranging the
symbols 501 on an outer circumferential face of the reel M3, a work
load required for arrangement can be reduced more remarkably than
in a case of arranging the symbols 501 while positioning them with
respect to a predetermined position (an origin position) of the
reel M3.
[0176] The slot machine 10 configured as described above is
provided in a gaming machine 300 in which a plurality of players
participate, as shown in FIG. 2. As the gaming machine 300, each of
a plurality of slot machines 10 that is a game terminal provided
with reel device M1 is connected to a center controller 200 so as
to enable data communication. The gaming machine 300 is capable of
individually executing a base game such as a slot game by means of
each slot machine 10 and is capable of executing a common game in
synchronism with each slot machine 10.
[0177] A connection between the slot machine 10 and the center
controller 200 may be either of a wired connection and a wireless
connection, or alternatively, may be a combination thereof. In
addition, a unit of bet amount may be a national or regional
currency such as dollars, Yens, or Euros, or alternatively, may be
game points to be used in halls provided with gaming machines 300
or in the relevant industry.
[0178] In more specific description of the above described
configuration, a gaming machine 300 has: an input device that
enables external input; a plurality of slot machines 10 that are
programmed to individually execute a base game and to execute a
variety of processing operations in order to play a common game
that is executed in a plurality of slot machines 10; and a center
controller 200 that is connected to enable communication with the
plurality of slot machines 10, and is programmed to execute a
variety of processing operations.
[0179] A terminal controller of the gaming machine 300 is capable
of executing at least three processing operations, i.e., a first
processing operation of executing a base game by inputting a start
operation from an input device; a second processing operation of
executing a common game by means of a game start command from the
center controller 200; and a third processing operation of
determining a game result of the common game, based on game result
information from the center controller 200.
[0180] A word "common game" used herein designates a subsidiary
game that is different from a main game that is essential in the
gaming machine 300. The common game is executed in parallel to a
basic game or is executed during one time point while the basic
game is stopped. For example, the common game includes a game such
as a claps game, a baseball game, or a soccer game.
[0181] The center controller 200 of the gaming machine 300 is
capable of executing at least three processing operations, i.e., a
first processing operation of outputting a game start command to a
slot machine 10 meeting a game execution condition with a
predetermined timing; a second processing operation of determining
a game result of a common game; and a third processing operation of
sequentially outputting the game result determined in the second
processing operation as game result information to each slot
machine 10.
[0182] A word "game execution condition" used herein designates a
condition for providing a qualification to participate in a common
game, for example, a condition that a cumulative value of bet
amounts in a base game is equal to or greater than a minimum bet
amount 1 or a condition that the number of base games is equal to
or greater than a minimum number of bets. The "game execution
condition" can be met by means of a player's intension immediately
before starting a common game. For example, in a case where the
game execution condition is not met due to the fact that the
cumulative value of bet amounts in the base game is less than the
minimum bet amount, a difference between the minimum bet amount and
the cumulative value of bet amounts is paid immediately before
starting the common game, or alternatively, a payment of the amount
when a predetermined condition has been met is made, whereby a
state in which the game execution condition has been met is
established. In addition, if the number of base games is
insufficient, a payment of the amount corresponding to such an
insufficiency or a payment of the amount when a predetermined
condition has been met is made, whereby a state in which the game
execution condition has been met is established.
[0183] In addition, a predetermined timing of outputting a game
start command is established when a common game start condition has
been established in any one slot machine 10. A word "common game
start condition" used here designates a condition such as a
cumulative value of bet amount information or a cumulative value of
the number of base games. While the embodiment describes use of a
gaming machine 300 provided with a center controller 200 apart from
a slot machine 10, the present invention is not limited thereto. As
the gaming machine 300, one or more slot machines 10 may be
configured to have a function of the center controller 200, whereas
slot machines 10 may be connected to each other to enable data
communication.
[0184] The "slot machine 10" described above is a one kind of game
terminal in the gaming machine 300. While the embodiment describes
a slot machine 10 as one example of game terminal, the present
invention is not limited thereto. A device type provided with a
terminal controller that is capable of independently executing any
base game can be applied as a game terminal.
[0185] The "base game" in the embodiment is executed by means of a
slot machine 10. The base game is a slot game to be played by
rearranging a plurality of symbols 501. The base game is not
limited to the slot game, and may be a game that can be
independently executed in a game terminal such as a slot machine
10.
[0186] Rearrangement of symbols 501 in a slot game is performed in
a reel device M1 (a symbol display device). The slot game has a
processing operation of executing a normal game to be played by
rearranging the symbols 501 in the reel device M1 on a condition
that a gaming value has been betted, and then, awarding a normal
prize according to the rearranged symbols 501; a processing
operation of, in a case where symbols 501 have been rearranged in a
predetermined condition in a normal game, executing a bonus game to
be played by rearranging the symbols 501 on a condition that a
payout rate that is greater than that in the normal game is
established, and then, awarding a bonus prize according to the
rearranged symbols 501; and a processing operation of executing
rescue processing in a case where a rescue start condition has been
established.
[0187] While a word "symbol 501" is not limited to a kind or number
as long as the symbol is rearranged in the reel symbol M1, it is a
generic concept of a specific symbol and a normal symbol. The
specific symbol is added to the normal symbol as required. For
example, the specific symbols include a wild symbol and a trigger
symbol. The wild symbol is a symbol that can be substituted as a
symbol 501 of any kind. The trigger symbol is a symbol that serves
as a trigger of starting execution of at least a bonus game. For
example, in the embodiment, "BLUE 7" is a kind of trigger symbol.
In addition, the trigger symbol may be a trigger of increasing a
specific symbol in a bonus game, i.e., increasing at least one
specific symbol of the trigger symbol and the wild symbol. Further,
the trigger symbol may be a trigger of increasing the number of
bonus games in a bonus game.
[0188] A word "gaming value" used herein designates a coin, a bill,
or electrical valid information equivalent thereto. The gaming
value in the present invention is not limited in particular, and
may be a gaming medium such as a medal, token, electronic money, or
a ticket. The ticket is not limited in particular, and may be a
barcode-attached ticket or the like to be described later, for
example.
[0189] A word "bonus game" used herein is synonym for a word
"feature game". While the bonus game in the embodiment is described
as a game to be played by repeating a free game, the bonus game may
be any kind of game as long as a game playing state that is more
advantageous than that in a normal game is established. This bonus
game may be employed together with another bonus game as long as a
game playing state that is advantageous for a player, i.e., a game
playing state that is more advantageous than that in a normal game
is established. For example, the bonus game may be realized in each
of various states such as a state in which more gaming values than
in a normal game can be acquired, a state in which gaming values
can be acquired at a higher probability than that in a normal game,
or a state in which less gaming values than in a normal game are
consumed, or alternatively, a combination of these states.
[0190] A word "free game" used herein designates a game in which
less betting of gaming values than in a normal game can be
executed. A word "less betting of gaming values can be executed"
includes a case in which the number of bets is "0". Therefore, the
"free game" is a game that is executed without establishment of a
condition for betting a gaming value, and is adapted to pay gaming
values whose amount is in accordance with the rearranged symbols
501. In other words, the "free game" may be a game to be started
without presupposition of consumption of a gaming value. In
contrast, a word "normal game" used here designates a game that is
executed on a condition for betting a gaming value, and is adapted
to pay gaming values whose amount is in accordance with the
rearranged symbols 501. In other words, the "normal game" is a game
to be started on the presupposition of consumption of a gaming
value.
[0191] A word "rearrangement" used here designates a state in which
symbols 501 are rearranged after arrangement of the symbols 501 has
been released. A word "arrangement" designates a state in which
symbols 501 can be visually checked by means of an external
player.
[0192] A word "normal prize according to rearranged symbols 501"
designates a normal prize that corresponds to a winning combination
of rearranged symbols. In addition, a word "bonus prize according
to rearranged symbols 501" designates a bonus prize that
corresponds to a winning combination of rearranged symbols. A word
"winning combination" used herein designates a combination of
establishing a prize. In addition, the word "winning combination"
also designates an arrangement or a combination of symbols
establishing a prize.
[0193] A "condition for establishing a payout rate that is greater
than that in a normal game", includes execution of a free game or
execution of a game of a game with an increase of a wild symbol or
a trigger symbol or with the use of a symbol substitution table and
the like. In addition, a base game, when a rescue start condition
is established, rescue processing may be executed.
[0194] A word "rescue processing" used herein designates a
processing operation for saving a player. For example, rescue
processing operations include execution of a free game, execution
of a game with an increase of a wild symbol or a trigger symbol or
with the use of a symbol substitution table, and awarding an
insurance prize or the like.
[0195] A "rescue start condition" includes: a state of excessive
continuation of normal game, i.e., a state in which normal game has
been repeated over a predetermined number of times; or a case of
excessively small amount of acquired prizes, i.e., a case in which
a predetermined value or more of normal prize or bonus prize has
been acquired when a same player has repeated a game over a
predetermined number of times or more. A word "rescue processing"
designates a processing operation for saving a player. For example,
the rescue processing operations include: execution of a free game;
execution of a game with an increase of a wild symbol or a trigger
symbol or with the use of a symbol substitution table; and awarding
an insurance prize or the like.
[0196] In addition, the gaming machine 300 further has a common
display device 700 that is provided at a position visually
recognizable from operation positions of all of the slot machines
10, and the center controller 200 may cause the common display
device 700 to display a state that is established until a common
game start condition has been established. A word "operating
position" used herein designates a player's eye position for
operating a slot machine 10. According to the gaming machine 300
having this configuration, the state that is established until the
common game start condition has been established is displayed on
the common display device 700 to thereby enable each player to
predict a waiting time required until the common game has been
started.
[0197] (Functional Flow of Gaming Machine 300: Slot Machine)
[0198] The gaming machine 300 that is configured as described above
has a slot machine 10 and an external control device 621 (a center
controller 200) that is connected to the slot machine 10 to enable
data communication. The external control device 621 is connected to
a plurality of slot machines 10 that are installed in a hall to
enable data communication.
[0199] Each slot machine 10 has a BET button 601, a spin button
602, and a display 614, and has a game controller 100 configured to
control each of these constituent elements. The BET button 601 and
the spin button 602 each are one kind of input device. Further,
each slot machine 10 has a transmitting/receiving portion 652 that
enables data communication with the external control device
621.
[0200] The BET button 601 described above has a function of
accepting a BET amount by means of a player operation. The spin
button 602 has a function of accepting a player operation, i.e.,
accepting start of a game such as a normal game by means of a start
operation. The display 614 has: a function of displaying still
image information such as a variety of symbols 501, numeric values,
or signs; and mobile image information such as a rendering image.
The display 614 has a symbol display region 614a, an image display
region 614b, and a common game display region 614c.
[0201] The symbol display region 614a has a reel device M1, and
displays symbols 501 of FIG. 1. The image display region 614b
displays a variety of image information on rendering that is
executed during the progress of a game by means of a mobile image
or a still image. The common game display region 614c is a region
adapted to display a common game such as a jackpot game, for
example.
[0202] The game controller 100 has a coin insertion/start check
portion 603, a normal game executing portion 605, a bonus game
start determining portion 606, a bonus game executing portion 607,
a random numeric value extracting portion 615, a symbol determining
portion 612, a rendering random numeric value extracting portion
616, a rendering content determining portion 613, a speaker portion
617, a lamp portion 618, a winning prize determining portion 619,
and a payout portion 620.
[0203] The normal game executing portion 605 has a function of
executing a normal game on a condition that operation of the BET
button 601 is made. The bonus game start determining portion 606
determines whether or not to execute a bonus game, based on a
combination of symbols 501 that have been rearranged in a normal
game. That is, the bonus game start determining portion 606 has a
function of determining that a player has won a bonus game when
trigger symbols have been rearranged under a predetermined
condition and then causing the routine to migrate to the bonus game
executing portion 607 so as to execute a bonus game from a next
unit game.
[0204] A word "unit game" designates a series of operation from
start of acceptance of BET to a state in which a winning prize is
established. For example, a unit game in a normal game designates a
state including a respective one of a BET time for accepting a BET,
a game time for rearranging stopped symbols 501, and a payout time
for payout processing to award a prize. The unit game in a normal
game is referred to as a unit normal game. In addition, a unit game
may be a game from when a player has operated the BET button 601 or
the spin button 602 to when a prize is determined after symbols
have been rearranged. In a case where a game can be started without
operating the BET button 601, such as in the case of a free game,
it is preferable that a time point at which a player has operated
the spin button 602 be a time point of starting a unit game.
[0205] The bonus game executing portion 607 has a function of
executing a bonus game in which a free game is repeated by a plural
number of games by means of only operation of the spin button
602.
[0206] The bonus game executing portion 612 has: a function of
determining symbols 501 targeted to be rearranged, with the use of
random numeric value values from the random numeric value
extracting portion 615; a function of rearranging the determined
symbols 501 in the symbol display region 614a of the display 614; a
function of outputting rearrangement information on the symbols 501
to a winning prize determining portion 619; and a function of
outputting a rendering specifying signal to the rendering random
numeric value extracting portion 616, based on a state of
rearrangement of the symbols 501.
[0207] The rendering random numeric value extracting portion 616
has: a function of extracting a rendering random numeric value in a
case where a rendering command signal has been received from the
symbol determining portion 612; and a function of outputting the
rendering random numeric value to the rendering content determining
portion 613. The rendering content determining portion 613 has: a
function of determining the contents of rendering with the use of
the rendering random numeric value; a function of outputting the
determined contents of rendering to the image display region 614b
of the display 614; and a function of outputting voice/light
emission information on the determined contents of rendering to the
speaker portion 617 and the lamp portion 618.
[0208] The winning prize determining portion 619 has: a function of
determining the presence or absence of a winning prize in a case
where rearrangement information on symbols 501 has been obtained as
a display state in which symbols have been rearranged in the
display 614; a function of computing a payout amount based on a
winning combination when a winning prize has been determined; and a
function of outputting a payout signal that is based on the payout
amount to the payout portion 620. The payout portion 620 has a
function of paying out a gaming value to a player in a mode of a
coin, a medal, or a credit and the like. In addition, the payout
portion 620 has a function of adding credit data according to a
credit to be paid out to credit data that is stored in an IC card
500 inserted into a PTS terminal 700 to be described later.
[0209] Further, the game controller 100 has a storage portion
configured to store a variety of BET amount data, although not
shown. The storage portion is a device configured to store data
contained in a hard disk unit or a memory in a rewritable
manner.
[0210] Further, the game controller 100 has a common game executing
portion 653. The common game executing portion 653 has: a function
of outputting BET amount information that is based on a BET amount
betted in a normal game to the external control device 621 every
time unit base game is played; a function of executing a common
game by means of a game start command from the external control
device 621; and a function of accepting a BET input by means of the
BET button 601 as to a BET amount that corresponds to data on a BET
amount data for common game that can be betted in a common
game.
[0211] Furthermore, the game controller 100 is connected to the PTS
terminal 700. The PTS terminal 700 is a unit in which an LCD 719,
microphones 704 and 705, and human body detecting cameras 712 and
713 or the like are integrated with each other. and has a function
of communicating with the game controller 100 to thereby perform
rendering of a game, for example. In particular, a card insertion
slot 706 is provided in the PTS terminal 700 so as to be able to
insert an IC card 500. In this manner, a player inserts the IC card
500 into the card insertion slot 706 to thereby able to use a
credit that is stored in the IC card 500 at a slot machine 10. A
mechanical configuration of the PTS terminal 700 will be described
later.
[0212] Moreover, the game controller 100 updates credit display of
the display 614 when the credit controller has received credit data
from the PTS terminal 700. Further, the game controller 100 outputs
liquidation credit data to the PTS terminal 700 in a case where a
game liquidation has occurred.
[0213] In addition, the PTS terminal 700 included in a respective
one of a plurality of slot machines 10 configuring a gaming machine
300 is connected to a management server 800 to enable communication
therewith, and integrally performs image downloading or management
of IC card 500 or credit.
[0214] Further, a slot machine 10 enables a reel setting device 635
to be connected thereto via a transmitting/receiving portion 652.
The reel setting device 635 has a function as an external operating
means for outputting an operation command signal by means of an
external operation. As the reel setting device 635, a personal
computer of FIG. 1 is exemplified in addition to an exclusive
setting device.
[0215] For example, in a case where the reel setting device 635 is
a personal computer, an operation command signal can be output with
a timing when an operation of a specific key such as an enter key
has been made. In this manner, an operator who provides setting of
the reel device M1 can output an operation command signal by means
of a key operation while checking an operating procedure on a
display screen of the personal computer.
[0216] In addition, the reel setting device 635 may be a reel
setting enabling member such as a USB memory that can be removably
mounted on the transmitting/receiving portion 652 or may be a
variety of buttons such as a BET button 601 that is provided in a
slot machine 10. In this case, when the reel setting enabling
member is connected to the transmitting/receiving portion 652, the
slot machine 10 itself serves as a part of the reel setting device
635. Then, the operator who providing setting of the reel device M1
can output an operation command signal by means of operation of an
operating button while checking an operating procedure that is
displayed in the image display region 614b or the like in the
display 614 of the slot machine 10.
[0217] Further, each slot machine 10 has a reel control portion
631, a reel setting portion 632, a reel setting storage portion
633, and a magnetic force detecting portion 630. The magnetic force
detecting portion 630 has a function of detecting a magnetic force
in an external magnetic field to thereby output a magnetic force
detection signal. The reel setting storage portion 633 stores a
variety of data required for reel setting such as a magnetic force
detection value included in a magnetic force detection signal that
has been continuously detected together with rotation of the reel
M3. The reel control portion 631 has a function of controlling the
reel device M1 so as to rearrange symbols 501 in a predetermined
arrangement state, based on a magnetic force detection signal and
the arrangement position of the symbols 501.
[0218] The reel setting portion 632 has a function of associating a
magnetic force detection signal and the arrangement position of the
symbols 501 with each other. Specifically, the reel setting portion
632 has a function of acquiring a magnetic force detection value of
a magnetic force detecting signal as being a magnetic force value
in a reel origin position, with a timing of outputting an operation
command signal. In this manner, the operation command signal is
output by means of an external operation, so that predetermined
symbols 501 can be positioned in a predetermined location (an
origin position) of the reel M3 by providing a setting work of
operating the reel setting device 635 with a timing with which a
predetermined arrangement state is established while the operator
visually checks an arrangement state of the symbols 501. As a
result, the reel setting portion 632 enables a work of setting a
positional relationship between a symbol 501 and a reel M3 to be
easily started by means of an operation of the reel setting device
635.
[0219] (Functional Flow of Gaming Machine 300: External Control
Device)
[0220] The gaming machine 300 configured as described above is
connected to an external control device 621. The external control
device 621 has a function of remotely operating and remotely
monitoring an operating state of each slot machine 10 or a
processing operation such as changing a variety of game setting
values. Further, the external control device 621 has a function of
determining a common game start condition for each game terminal
and then executing a common game in a plurality of slot machines 10
when a determination result satisfying the common game start
condition has been obtained in any of the game terminals.
[0221] In a detailed description, the external control device 621
has a common game start portion 6213, a game terminal selecting
portion 6215, and a transmitting/receiving portion 6217 (not
shown). The common game start determining portion 6213 has: a
function of determining whether or not a common game start
condition is established, based on a cumulative value of bet amount
information that is transmitted from a slot machine 10 in each base
game; a function of outputting a game start command to a plurality
of slot machine 10; and a function of displaying a state that is
established until the common game start condition has been
established on the common display device 700.
[0222] Determination of whether or not the common game start
condition is established may be made based on all of the cumulative
values that are obtained by repetition of a unit base game as well
as based on a cumulative value of bet amount information. For
example, the number of base games or a base game playing time and
the like may be a cumulative value.
[0223] Further, the common game start portion 6213 has a function
of outputting a game start command to a slot machine 10 in which a
cumulative value increasing due to repetition of a base game
satisfies a game execution condition. In this manner, the common
game start portion 6213 enables a player to have a consciousness to
actively repeat a base game because a qualification to participate
in a common game is not provided to a slot machine 10 whose
cumulative value is less than a minimum setting value.
[0224] Further, the common game start portion 6213 has a function
of monitoring a non-input time during which no start operation is
made and then outputting a game start command to slot machines 10
other than a slot machine 10 whose non-input time is more than a
timeout time. In this manner, the common game start portion 6213 is
capable of determining that a player is absent as to a slot machine
10 in which no base game is executed over a timeout time or more,
and is capable of avoiding execution of a common game for such a
slot machine 10.
[0225] The game terminal selecting portion 6215 has a function of
selecting a specific slot machine 10 from among a plurality of slot
machines 10 and then outputting a common game start command signal
to the specific slot machine 10. The transmitting/receiving portion
6217 has a function enabling transmission/reception of data to/from
the slot machine 10.
[0226] <<Functional Flow of Game>>
[0227] FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a functional flow of a game in
a gaming machine according to the embodiment.
[0228] A player operates a start button, whereby a unit game is
started. Next, winning determination processing is executed (step
SF311) and then kinds of symbols to be rearranged are determined.
After that, reels start rotation, movement of symbols is started,
and then a unit game in a basic game starts. After that, the reels
are controlled to be stopped (step SF313) and then symbols having
been determined by means of winning determination processing are
rearranged.
[0229] In a basic game of the embodiment, when five reels have
stopped (when symbols, (for example, scatter symbols) have been
rearranged), five or more bonus symbols are displayed in a stopped
state, whereby a condition for the routine to migrate to a bonus
game is established.
[0230] In a gaming machine of the embodiment, when five reels have
stopped, a maximum of ten bonus symbols can be displayed in a
stopped state. Zero to two bonus symbols are displayed in a stopped
state as to one reel. That is, when symbols have been rearranged,
there is a case where no bonus symbol is displayed in a stopped
state as to one reel, in a case where one bonus symbol is displayed
in a stopped state, or in a case where two bonus symbols are
displayed in a stopped state. In a case where two bonus symbols are
displayed in a stopped state as to all of the five reels, ten bonus
symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
[0231] Among the five reels, wild symbols are arranged on at least
a second reel and a fourth reel. As described above, a wild symbol
is a symbol that can be substituted as a symbol of any kind, and is
also referred to as an almighty symbol. That is, a wild symbol is a
symbol having a function enabling substitution into any of the
symbols used in a gaming machine, and in particular, is a symbol
that can be substituted so that a game result is advantageous to a
player. In the gaming machine of the embodiment, when a wild symbol
has been rearranged, a prize is increased twice as usual as to one
wild symbol. Wild symbols may be arranged on all of the five reels.
Reels on which wild symbols are to be arranged may be determined as
required.
[0232] After arrangement of predetermined symbols has been
determined by means of winning determination processing, when the
symbols are rearranged, a small hit is established (step SF315), a
predetermined prize is awarded, and a unit game in a basic game
completes.
[0233] As described above, in a case where a (bonus-in) condition
for the routine to migrate to a bonus game when five reels have
stopped, the routine migrates to the bonus game.
[0234] After the routine has migrated to the bonus game, roulette
lottery is performed (step SF317). By means of the roulette
lottery, a magnification relative to one bonus symbol is determined
by way of winning determination processing (step SF319). When
roulette lottery starts, a roulette image displayed on an upper
image display panel 131 is displayed in an enlarged manner and then
a game in which a magnification is determined by means of lottery
is executed in such a manner that a lamp has lit.
[0235] As the more bonus symbols when a bonus-in condition has been
established are, the more times of roulette lottery can be
performed. For example, five bonus symbols are arranged, one
roulette lottery is performed, or alternatively, when ten bonus
symbols are arranged, ten times of roulette lottery are performed.
For example, when a magnification is determined to be 50 in a first
time in roulette lottery and then a magnification is determined to
be 50 in a second time in roulette lottery, the magnification is
determined to be 50+50=100. When two or more times of roulette
lottery are performed, a magnification other than a predetermined
one is determined by means of lottery.
[0236] A magnification determined by means of roulette lottery is
used every time a bonus symbols stops in a free game to be
described later and then a prize is determined.
[0237] Next, a free game is performed (step SF321), and when a
bonus symbol is displayed in a stopped state, a magnification
determined by means of roulette lottery is determined as to one
bonus symbol (step SF323). For example, when four bonus symbols
have been displayed in a stopped state in a free game, four bonus
symbols are multiplied for the abovementioned magnification 100 and
then 100.times.4=400 are determined as a prize.
[0238] In addition, when five or more bonus symbols have been
displayed in a stopped state in a free game, retrigger is
established in addition to a prize. When retrigger is established,
at least one roulette lottery can be performed again (step SF325)
and then a magnification is determined again (step SF327).
[0239] When retrigger has been established, additional five free
games can be further performed. When roulette lottery is performed
by means of retrigger, a magnification is further added. The number
of times of roulette lottery increases in accordance with the
number of bonus symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in a
free game.
[0240] In addition, a full rotation slow rendering in which all of
the five reels spin slowly may be occasionally determined in
accordance with a result of the winning determination processing in
step SF311 described above (step SF313). If a predetermined
character is displayed on the upper image display panel 131 while
the reels spin, reel rotation gradually slows down and then symbols
with a high prize or bonus symbols are gradually rearranged. The
longer time the reels spin slowly, the more symbols are gradually
rearranged.
[0241] (Entire Configuration of Game System)
[0242] A game system 350 that includes gaming machines 300 having
the respective functions described above will be described
hereinafter.
[0243] As shown in FIG. 4, the game system 350 includes a plurality
of slot machines 10 and an external control device 621 that is
connected to each of the slot machines 10 via a communication line
301.
[0244] The external control device 621 is configured to control a
plurality of slot machines 10. In the embodiment, the external
control device 621 is a so called hall server that is installed in
a gaming facility having a plurality of slot machines 10. Each of
the slot machines 10 has its own identification number assigned
thereto, and the external control device 621 determines a source of
data to be transmitted from each of the slot machines 10, in
accordance with the assigned identification number. In addition, in
a case where data is transmitted from the external control device
621 to a slot machine 10 as well, a transmission destination is
specified with the use of the assigned identification number.
[0245] The game system 350 may be constructed in one gaming
facility that is capable of performing a variety of games, such as
a casino, or may be constructed across a plurality of gaming
facilities. In a case where the game system 350 is constructed in
one gaming facility, the game system may be constructed every floor
or every section in the gaming facility. The communication line 301
may be wired or wireless, and a leased line or a switched line and
the like can be employed.
[0246] As shown in FIG. 5, the game system is divided into three
sections, i.e. a management server block, a customer terminal
block, and a staff terminal block. The management server block has
a casino hall server 850, a money exchange server 860, a
casino/hotel staff management server 870, and a download server
880.
[0247] The casino hall sever 850 is a server configured to manage
an entire casino hall in which slot machines 10 have been
installed. The money exchange server 860 is a server configured to
prepare money exchange rate data based on money exchange
information. The casino/hotel staff management server 870 is a
server configured to manage staffs in a casino hall or a hotel
associated with the casino hall. The download server 880 is a
server configured to download information relating to games or the
latest information such as news and then broadcast the downloaded
information to players through the PTS terminals 700 of a variety
of slot machines 10.
[0248] In addition, the management server block has a member
management server 810, an IC card & money management server
820, a megabucks server 830, and an image server 840.
[0249] The member management server 810 is a server configured to
manage members information on a player who plays a game at a slot
machine 10. The IC card & money management server 820 is a
server configured to manage an IC card 500 used in a slot machine
10. Specifically, the IC card & money management server 820 is
a server configured to store fraction money data to be associated
with an identification code or to output the fraction money data to
the PTS terminal 700. The IC card & money management server 820
is also configured to prepare and manage denomination data or the
like. The megabucks server 830 is a server configured to manage
megabucks serving as games in which a total amount of betted money
in a plurality of slot machines 10 installed in a plurality of
casino hall is determined as a prize. The image server 840 is a
server configured to download an image relating to a game or a
latest image such as news, for example, and then, broadcast the
downloaded image to players through the PTS terminal 700 of a
variety of slot machines 10.
[0250] The customer terminal block has a slot machine 10, a PTS
terminal 700, and a liquidation machine 750. The PTS terminal 7 00
can be mounted on the slot machine 10 and can communicate with the
management server 800. The liquidation machine 750 is a machine
configured to cash out and liquidate money data that is stored in
an IC card 500 that a player owns or to store a coin or a bill as
money data in the IC card 500.
[0251] The staff terminal block has a staff management terminal 900
and a member card issuing terminal 950. The staff management
terminal 900 is a terminal for staffs in a casino hall to manage a
variety of slot machines 10. In particular, in the case of the
embodiment, the staffs in a casino hall manage whether too many IC
cards 500 are stocked in the PTS terminal 700 or the number of IC
cards 500 is insufficient. The member card issuing terminal 950 is
a terminal for a player who plays a game in a casino hall to use
when issuing a member card.
[0252] (PTS Terminal 700)
[0253] A PTS terminal 700, as shown in FIG. 6, is incorporated in a
PTS system. The PTS terminal 700 that is mounted on a slot machine
10 is connected to a game controller 100 and a bill validator
controller 890 of the slot machine 10 to enable communication
therewith.
[0254] The PTS terminal 700 performs rendering of a game by means
of sound or image and the like or updating of credit data in
communication with the game controller 100. In addition, the PTS
terminal 700 transmits credit data required for liquidation in
communication with the bill validator controller 890.
[0255] In addition, the PTS terminal 700 is connected to a
management server 800 to enable communication therewith. The PTS
terminal 700 communicates with the management server 800 between
two lines, .i.e., between a general communication line and an
additional function communication line.
[0256] The PTS terminal 700 makes communication of data such as
money data or identification code data or members information on
players, for example, in the general communication line. On the
other hand, the PTS terminal 700 makes communication relating to
functions to be newly added in the additional function
communication line. In the case of the embodiment, the PTS terminal
700 makes communication relating to an exchange function, an IC
card function, a biological authentication function, a camera
function, or an RFID (Radio Frequency IDentification) function
serving as a function of making solid identification with the use
of radio waves.
[0257] (Mechanical Configuration of Slot Machine)
[0258] An entire structure of a slot machine 10 will be described
with reference to FIG. 7.
[0259] In the slot machine 10, a coin, a bill or electronic
variable information equivalent thereto is employed as a gaming
medium. In particular, in the embodiment, credit-related data such
as money data, stored in an IC card 500, is employed.
[0260] The slot machine 10 includes a cabinet 11, a top box 12 that
is installed at an upper side of the cabinet 11; and a main door 13
that is provided on a front face of the cabinet 11.
[0261] A reel M1 is provided on the main door 13. A reel cover 134
is provided on a front face of the reel M1. The reel cover 134 has
a transparent liquid crystal panel or a transparent panel. In
addition, the reel cover 134 may include a touch panel. The reel
cover 134 has a display window 150 at a center part of the cover.
The display window 150 is capable of visually recognizing twenty
symbols 501 in five columns and four lines from the outside. Four
symbols 501 in each column are a part of symbol groups that are
arrange on an outer circumferential face of the reel M3. Each reel
M3 is movably displayed in a downward direction or in an upward
direction while four symbols 501 entirely change a speed, thereby
enabling the symbols 501 that are displayed in each symbol 501 to
be rearranged in a stopped manner after these symbols have been
rotated in a vertical direction.
[0262] The number of symbols to be redisplayed on the display
window 150 is not limited to the example described above. A third
embodiment to bee described later shows a case in which a total of
fifteen symbols 501 in five columns and three lines are displayed
in a stopped state and then are rearranged so as to be visually
recognizable from the outside on the display window 150.
[0263] At a left end part and at a right end part of the display
window 150, two pay line generation columns are arranged
horizontally symmetrically. Among them, a pay line generation
column at the left end part, which is arranged at a left side
viewed from a player side has 25 pay line generating portions. In
addition, a pay line generating column at the right end part, which
is arranged at a right side, has 25 pay line generating
portions.
[0264] The pay line generating portion at the left side pat forms a
pair with either one of the pay lines generating portions at the
right end part. From each of the pay line generating portions at
the left end part, a pay line which is a line oriented to a pay
line generating portion at the end pat in relationship with a pair
with such each pay line generation portion is specified in advance.
A total of 25 pay lines are specified.
[0265] The pay lines described above are activated by connecting
the pay line generating portions at the left end part and at the
right end part to each other. In other cases, these pay lines are
deactivated. A valid number of pay lines is determined based on a
BET amount. In the case of MAX BET that is a maximum BET amount, a
maximum number of 25 pay lines is activated. The activated pay
lines are configured to establish a variety of winning combinations
as to each symbol 501. A detailed description of the winning
combinations will be given later. An activated pay line is also
referred to as a winning line.
[0266] While the embodiment describes a case in which a slot
machine 10 includes a reel device M1 of a mechanical reel system,
the slot machine 10 of the present invention may be the one in
which a video reel system and a mechanism reel system for
displaying pseudo reels are caused to coexist. In addition, a touch
panel may be provided on the reel cover 134. In this case, a player
can input a variety of commands by operating the touch panel. An
input signal from the touch panel is transmitted to a main CPU
71.
[0267] A control panel 30 is disposed at a lower part of the reel
device M1. The control panel 30 includes a variety of buttons, a
coin entry 21 configured to accept a coin in a cabinet 11, and a
bill entry 22.
[0268] Specifically, the control panel 30, as shown in FIG. 8,
includes: a reserve button 31, a collect button 32, and a game rule
button 33 that are disposed at an upper stage in a left side region
toward the panel; 1-BET button 34, a 2-BETS button 35, 3-BETS
button 37, a 5-BETS button 38, and 10-BETS button 39 that are
disposed at a middle stage in a left side region; and a PLAY 2
LINES button 40, a PLAY 10 LINES button 41, a PLAY 20 LINES button
42, a PLAY 40 LINES button 43, and a MAX LINES button 44 that are
disposed at a lower stage in a left side region.
[0269] Further, the control panel 30 includes: a coin entry 21 and
a bill entry 22 that are disposed at an upper stage in a right side
region toward the panel; and a gamble button 45 and a start button
46 that are disposed at a lower stage in a left side region.
[0270] The reserve button 31 described above is an operating button
to be employed when a player wants to leave a seat or when a player
wants to request the staffs in a gaming facility to exchange money.
The collect button 32 is a so called liquidation button configured
to add the credit data relating to credits obtained in a variety of
games to the credit data that is stored in the IC card 500 inserted
into the PTS terminal 700. The game rule button 33 is a button to
be depressed in a case where a game operation method or the like is
unclear, and when the game rule button 33 is depressed, a variety
of help information is displayed on an upper image display panel
131 to be described later.
[0271] The 1-BET button 34 is a button to be employed when player
currently owned credits are betted on a one-by-one basis for each
winning pay line every time the button is depressed. The 2-BETS
button 35 is a button for starting a game in 2 BETS for each
winning pay line. In addition, the 3-BETS button 37 is a button for
starting a game by placing 3 BETS for each winning pay line.
Further, the 5-BETS button 38 is a button for starting a game by
placing 5 BETS for each winning pay line. Furthermore, the 10-BETS
button 39 is a button for starting a game by placing 10 BETS for
each winning pay line. Therefore, the number of BETS to be betted
for each winning pay line is determined by depressing any one of
the 1-BET button 34, the 2-BETS button 35, the 3-BETS button 37,
the 5-BETS button 38, and the 10-BETS button 39.
[0272] The PLAY 2 LINES button 40 is a button configured to
activate pay lines by pressing it. In this manner, two pay lines
are activated. The PLAY 10 LINES button 41 is a button configured
to activate pay lines by pressing it. In this manner, 10 pay lines
are activated. The PLAY 20 LINES button 42 is a button configured
to activate pay lines by pressing it. In this manner, 20 pay lines
are activated. The PLAY 40 LINES button 43 is a button configured
to activate pay lines by pressing it. In this manner, 40 pay lines
are activated. Further the MAX LINES button 44 is a button
configured to activate pay lines by pressing it. In this manner, a
maximum of 50 pay lines are activated.
[0273] The gamble button 45 is an operating button to be employed
when the routine is caused to migrate to a gamble game after a
bonus game has completed, for example. The gamble game used herein
is a game to be played by using acquired credits.
[0274] The start button 46 is a button to be employed when
scrolling of symbols 501 is started. In addition, this start button
46 also functions as a button for starting a bonus game or adding
the prize acquired in the bonus game to the credits. The coin entry
21 is configured to accept a coin in the cabinet 11. The bill entry
22 is configured to validate whether an entered bill is legitimate
or not and to accept a legitimate bill in the cabinet 11.
[0275] As shown in FIG. 7, a coin acceptance inlet 18 for accepting
a coin and a belly glass 132 on which a character or the like of a
slot machine 10 is drawn are provided on a lower front face of the
main door 13, i.e., at a lower side of the control panel 30.
[0276] An upper image display panel 131 is provided on a front face
of the top box 12. The upper image display panel 131 is made of a
liquid crystal panel, and configures a display. The upper image
display panel 131 displays an image relating to rendering or an
image indicating an introduction of the contents of a game or a
rule of the game. In addition, a speaker 112 and a lamp 111 are
provided on the top box 12. In a slot machine 10, rendering is
executed by means of image display, sound output, and light
output.
[0277] A data display 174 and a keypad 173 are provided at a lower
side of the upper image display panel 131. The data display 174 is
made of a fluorescent display or an LED, and is configured to
display members data read from the IC card 500 that is inserted
from the PTS terminal 700, for example, or data input by a player
via the keypad 173. The keypad 173 is configured to input data.
[0278] An expectation value meter 160 is provided at an upper part
of the display window 150. The expectation value meter 160 is made
of an opening 162 and a backlight 164 (not shown). The opening 162
is a through hole formed in the reel cover 134. The opening 162 has
a length that is substantially equal to a width of the display
window 150. The backlight 164 is made of a full-color LED (Light
Emitting Diode). The backlight 164 is provided along the opening
162 on a rear face of the reel cover 134. In accordance with a
color of light emitted from the full-color LED or a region in which
light is to be emitted, a degree of expectation indicating a
possibility that a unit game is advantageous can be indicated for a
player. In a case where the full-color LED is made of a plurality
of LED elements, a region in which light is to be emitted can be
determined by changing the number of LED elements configured to
emit light.
[0279] While the example described above showed a case in which the
expectation value meter 160 is made of the opening 162, a region
having its transparency, which is formed on the reel cover 134, for
example, a transparent region may be provided in place of the
opening 162. The region having its transparency, like the opening
162, is formed in an elongated shape in a horizontal direction, and
has a length that is substantially equal to the width of the
display window 150. The backlight 164 is provided on a rear face of
the region having its transparency, whereby the expectation value
meter 160 can be configured.
[0280] The degree of expectation may be information indicating a
possibility that a unit game is advantageous. For example, the
degree of expectation includes an expectation value indicating a
possibility of winning a prize such as a bonus. In the case of the
expectation value, if a probability of winning a prize such as a
bonus is 1/300, a winning possibility becomes higher as the number
of unit games continuously failing to win a prize is close to 300
times. A color of light to be emitted or a light emitting region
may be determined by computing an expectation value from the number
of unit games continuously failing to win a prize and a probability
of winning a prize. If the expectation value is high, a region in
which light is to be emitted by means of an LED is increased, or
alternatively, if the expectation value is low, a region in which
light is to be emitted by means of an LED is decreased. By doing
his, the expectation value can be visually recognized by a player
immediately.
[0281] In addition, an expectation value indicating a possibility
of winning a small hit combination as well as a bonus may be
employed as a degree of expectation. Further, the expectation value
is different depending on a kind of bonus or a kind of small hit
combination; and therefore, it is preferable to change a color of
light emission in accordance with a kind of bonus or a kind of
small hit combination. In this way, in a case where the degree of
expectation indicates an expectation value for a variety of bonuses
or a small hit combination, the expectation value meter 160 may
cause an LED to emit light so as to indicate expectation values of
all kinds. Alternatively, one of plural kinds of bonuses or plural
kinds of small hit combinations may be sequentially indicated by
means of the expectation value meter 160 in each unit game. By
doing this, a player can be given a motivation to repeatedly play a
unit game in order to acquire an expectation value.
[0282] Further, the degree of expectation may be information
relating to a prize that a player can acquire. A prize which can be
awarded by a player continuously playing a unit game may be
computed based on a prize to be awarded every time a winning prize
is obtained and a probability of winning a prize or the like. In
this case, information relating to a prize that can be awarded by
winning a prize such as a bonus can be employed. In addition, there
may be a prize that can be awarded by a bonus or a prize that can
be awarded by a small hit combination. These prizes can be
indicated for a player by means of a color of the light that is
emitted by an LED or a region in which light is to be emitted.
[0283] (Mechanical Configuration of PTS Terminal)
[0284] The PTS terminal 700 is mounted between the reel device M1
and the control panel 30. The PTS terminal 700 includes an LCD 719,
as shown in FIG. 9. The LCD 719 is disposed at a center part of the
PTS terminal 700. The LCD 719 is configured to display a rendering
image for rendering a game, for example.
[0285] Human body detecting cameras 712 and 713, microphones 704
and 705, and bass reflection type (bass reflex type) speakers 707
and 708 are disposed at an upper part of the PTS terminal 700.
[0286] The human body detecting cameras 712 and 713 are configured
to detect the presence or absence of a player by means of a camera
function and then output a signal to a unit controller 730 to be
described later. The microphones 704 and 705 are used for a player
to participate in a game by means of voice or to authenticate a
player by means of voice recognition. The speakers 707 and 708 are
configured to perform rendering of a game by means of voice and to
output a broadcasting sound caused by a failure to remove an IC
card 500. Further, the speakers 707 and 708 are configured to
output a broadcasting sound in a case where authentication of an
inserted IC card 500 has failed as well. The speakers 707 and 708
are installed so as to listen to a sound via a duct from a back
side of the LCD 719 in a stereoscopic manner on a front side (on a
player side), and can be installed in a space reduction manner.
[0287] In addition, an LED 709 and a card insertion slot 706 are
provided in the PTS terminal 700. The LED 709 is configured to
broadcast a remaining number of IC cards 500 having been stacked in
a card stacker 714 to be described later. Specifically, in a case
where the remaining number of IC cars 500 is 5 or less, the LED 709
lights in yellow, in a case where the remaining number is 6 to 24,
the LED 709 lights in blue, or alternatively, in a case where the
remaining number is 25 or more, the LED 709 lights in green. In a
case where the remaining number of IC cards 500 is 0 or 30, the LED
709 lights in gray and a game being executed is stopped. In this
manner, for example, in a case where the LED 709 lights in yellow,
the staff in a casino hall immediately determines that the
remaining number of IC cards 500 is small and then IC cards 500 can
be refilled. On the other hand, for example, in a case where the
LED 709 lights in green, the staff in a casino hall immediately
determine that the remaining number of IC cards is full and then IC
cards 500 can be removed. In a case where IC cards 500 are
supplied, these cards can be supplied by inserting the IC cards 500
that are owned by only the respective staffs through a card
insertion slot 706. On the other hand, in a case where IC cards 500
are removed, one card called a refill card is inserted through the
card insertion slot 706, whereby ten IC cards 500 are ejected
together with the refill card. In this manner, there is no need for
the staffs to check the remaining number of IC cards 500 in each
slot machine 10 on a management server or to check the remaining
number by actually opening the main door 13 of such each slot
machine 10, thus resulting in improvement of security.
[0288] The card insertion slot 706 has a mechanism that is capable
of inserting or removing an IC card 500. The IC card 500 is
inserted so that a display portion 510 is upward and so that the
card is oriented in opposite to the card insertion slot 706. In
addition, while the IC card 500 is completely inserted while a
player plays a game, the card is ejected so that the display
portion 510 is exposed at the time of liquidation. In this manner,
the player can check a credit-related data such as updated money
data. Further, the IC card 500 may be retained so that the display
portion 510 is exposed while the card is not completely inserted
even while the player plays a game. In this manner, the player can
always check how credits are updated while in the play of a game.
At the time of credit liquidation, In a case where it is detected
that no player exists with the use of the human body detecting
cameras 712 and 713, the IC card 500 is pulled to the inside so as
to be stacked in the card stacker 714. In this manner, for example,
even in a case where a player having checked that the remaining
number of credits is small by means of the display portion 510
leaves his or her seat while leaving the IC card 500 intentionally,
the IC card 500 is never inserted for a long period of time. In the
case of the embodiment, the card stacker 714 can stack up to 30
cards.
[0289] As described above, the PTS terminal 700 of the embodiment
realizes space reduction because a variety of devices having a
microphone function, a camera function, a speaker function, and a
display function or the like integrally formed one unit. In this
manner, for example, the respective functions are installed solely,
whereby there dnever occurs an inconvenience that a speaker cannot
be installed toward a player if an LCD is oriented to the
player.
[0290] (Reel Device M1)
[0291] The reel device M1 included in a slot machine 10, as shown
in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, has: a reel unit M11 configured to
rearrange symbols 501 by rotationally driving a reel M3 having the
symbols 501 arranged on an outer circumferential face thereof; and
a reel unit retaining mechanism M12 configured to removably retain
the reel unit M11. In the following description, in a case where a
setting location of the reel unit M11 is specified, this reel unit
is referred to as first to fifth reel units M11a to M11e in
sequential order from a left end when it is viewed from a front
side.
[0292] (Reel Unit Retaining Mechanism M12)
[0293] The reel unit retaining mechanism M12, as shown in FIG. 12,
has: a reel unit support plate M121 that is capable of being
mounted on the cabinet 11 (a casing) of a slot machine 10; and a
slide retaining mechanism M122 that is provided on the reel unit
support plate M121 and is configured to retain the reel unit M11 to
be slidably movable relative to a front face side of the cabinet
11. In this manner, the reel device M1 can be mounted and removed
by means of the slide retaining mechanism M122 merely by sliding
the reel unit M11 relative to the reel unit support plate M121 if
the reel unit support plate M121 is mounted on the cabinet 11 of
the slot machine 10; and therefore, a process such as screw
tightening, which has been conventionally performed, can be
eliminated.
[0294] (Reel Unit Retaining Mechanism M12: Reel Unit Support Plate
M121)
[0295] In a more specific description, the reel unit retaining
mechanism M12 has a flat reel unit support plate M121. The reel
unit support plate M121 has: a rectangular flat plate portion M1211
that is horizontally disposed; a front face bent portion M1212 that
is bent downward from a front end edge of the flat plate portion
M1211; and a rear face bent portion M1213 that is bent upward from
a rear end edge of the flat plate portion M1211. The front face
bent portion M1212 and the rear face bent portion M1213 are
configured to hardly deform the reel unit support plate M121
relative to a weight when the reel unit M11 is retained.
[0296] A word "font end edge" used here designates one edge on a
front face side of a slot machine 10. On the other word, a word
"rear end edge" used here designates one edge of a rear face side
of a slot machine 10. In the embodiment, a side at which a player
who plays a game at this slot machine 10 is positioned while the
slot machine 10 is defined as a reference position is referred to
as a front side, a front direction, or a front face side, and a
back direction relative to the front side is referred to as a rear
side. In addition, a direction in which the slot machine 10 and the
player passes is referred to as a forward/backward direction, and a
horizontal direction orthogonal to the forward/backward direction
is referred to as a transverse direction.
[0297] As shown in FIG. 13, on a top face of the flat plate portion
M1211, a connector support member M1214 is provided in a transverse
direction (in a widthwise direction). The connector support member
M1214 is formed in an L shape on a longitudinal cross section in
the forward/backward direction, and has: a transversely provided
portion M1214a that is bonded with the flat plate portion M1211;
and an erected portion M1214b that is erected in a vertical
direction from the transversely provided portion M1214a. In the
erected portion M1214b, a connector engagement hole M1214c is
formed. The connector engagement hole M1214c is formed in number
corresponding to the number of reel units M11 installed. A forming
position of the connector engagement hole M1214c is set so that
when the reel unit M11 is installed on the reel unit flat plate
M121, a center part in the widthwise direction of the reel unit M11
and a center part in the widthwise direction of the connector
engagement hole M1214c are opposed to each other.
[0298] In addition, in the flat plate portion M1211, a plurality of
fixing holes M1211a are formed. These fixing holes M1211a are
respectively disposed at two longitudinal sites at a front position
of each of the connector engagement holes M1214c. That is, the
fixing holes M1211a are disposed in a matrix shape of two lines and
five columns in the flat plate portion M1211. The fixing holes
M1211a configure a part of a slide retaining mechanism M122 to be
described later, enabling a slide retaining member M1221 of FIG. 12
to be mounted on the reel unit support plate M121.
[0299] In each of the connector engagement holes M1214c described
above, a second connector M123 is provided as shown in FIG. 12. The
second connector M123 is a female type connector. That is, the
second connector M123, as shown in FIG. 14, has a connector
engagement member M1231 and a plurality of pin terminals M1232. The
pin terminals M1232 are electrically connected to a main PCB 110 of
FIG. 38 via a signal line, although not shown.
[0300] The connector engagement member M1231 has: mount portions
M1231a, M1231a that are formed at both end parts in a widthwise
direction; and a connector insert portion M1231b that is opened on
a front face side. As shown in FIG. 12, the mount portions M1231a,
M1231a are tightened with screws relative to the erected portion
M1214b of the connector support member M1214. In addition, as shown
in FIG. 18, the second connector M123 is electrically coupled to a
first connector M124 by inserting the first connector M124 that is
a male type connector included in the reel unit M11 when the reel
unit M11 is installed on the reel unit support plate M121.
[0301] (Reel Unit Retaining Mechanism M12: Slide Retaining
Mechanism M122)
[0302] At a front side of the second connector M123 that is
configured as described above, a slide retaining mechanism M122 is
disposed as shown in FIG. 12. The slide retaining mechanism M122
has a slide retaining member M1221. The slide retaining member
M1221 is formed transversely symmetrically relative to a centerline
in a forward/backward direction. The slide retaining member M1221
has: a side main body portion M1222; a first slide fixing portion
M1223 that is disposed at a front side of the slide main body
portion M1222; and a second slide fixing portion M1224 that is
disposed at a rear side of the slid main body portion M1222.
[0303] The slide main body portion M1222 is formed in a flat plate
shape on a top face and a bottom face. The top face of the slide
main body portion M1222 enables a reel support mechanism M6 to be
supported in a planar shape. On the other hand, the bottom face of
the slide main body portion M1222 abuts in a planar shape with the
flat plate portion M1211 of the reel unit support plate M121 to
thereby enable the reel support mechanism M6 to be supported in a
planar shape by means of the reel unit support plate M121.
[0304] The slide main body portion M1222, as shown in FIG. 15, is
formed in a top-viewing rectangular shape while a forward/backward
direction is defined as a longitudinal direction. A through home
M1222a is formed at a center part of the slide main body portion
M1222. The through hole M1222a enables fixing to the reel unit
support plate M121 by means of screw tightening, as shown in FIG.
12.
[0305] On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the first slide
fixing portion M1223 that is disposed at a front side of the slide
main body portion M1222 is formed in a flat face shape that is
identical to the slide main body portion M1222. The first slide
fixing portion M1223 is formed in a top-viewing square shape having
a widthwise dimension that is longer than a widthwise dimension of
the slide main body portion M1222. In other words, both end parts
in the widthwise direction of the first slide fixing portion M1223
are more protrusive than both end parts in the widthwise direction
of the slide main body portion M1222.
[0306] A through hole M1223a is formed at a center part of the
first slide fixing portion M1223. The through hole M1223a enables
fixing to the reel unit support by means of screw tightening. In
addition, a fixing protrusion portion M1223b is formed at a front
end part of the first slide fixing portion M1223. The fixing
protrusion portion M1223b is formed so as to protrude obliquely
upward from the first slide fixing portion M1223 toward a rear
side. At a tip end part of the fixing protrusion portion M1223b, a
protrusion portion M1223 is formed downward. The fixing protrusion
portion M1223b has a function of fixing the reel unit M11 in a
vertical direction and disabling movement in a forward/backward
direction.
[0307] On a top face of the first slide fixing portion M1223, slide
stop portions M1223c, M1223c are disposed transversely
symmetrically. The slide stop portion M1223c is formed by a wall
portion that is opened on a front face side and a top face side,
i.e., by a wall portion formed in a top-viewing L shape that is
protruded upward from an inside portion to a rear side position.
The slide stop portion M1223a has a function of stopping the reel
unit M11 at a predetermined position in the forward/backward
direction when the reel unit is slidably moved from a front side.
On the other hand, on a bottom face of the first slide fixing
portion M1223, insert portions M1223e, M1223e that are opened at a
front side are formed transversely symmetrically.
[0308] In addition, coupling portions M1223d, M1223d are formed at
a rear end part of the first slide fixing portion M1223. The
coupling portions M1223d, M1223d are formed so as to protrude
obliquely downward from the first slide fixing portion M1223 to a
rear side. The coupling portions M1223d, M1223d, as shown in FIG.
16, has a function of engaging with the fixing hole M1211a that is
disposed at a front side of the flat plate portion M1211 in an
oblique direction to thereby fix the slide retaining member M1221
to the reel support plate M121 in a vertical direction.
[0309] On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the second slide
fixing portion M1224 that is disposed at a rear side of the slide
main body portion M1222 is formed in a flat plate shape that is
identical to the slide main body portion M1222. The second slide
fixing portion M1224 is formed in a top-viewing square shape having
a widthwise dimension that is longer than a widthwise dimension of
the slide main body portion M1222. In other words, both end parts
in the widthwise direction of the second slide fixing portion M1224
are more protrusive than both end parts in the widthwise direction
of the slide main body portion M1222.
[0310] A through hole M1224a is formed at a center part of the
second slide fixing portion M1224. The through hole M1224a enables
fixing to the reel unit support plate M121 by means of screw
tightening. In addition, on a top face of the second slide fixing
portion M1224, slide stop portions M1224b, 1224b are disposed
transversely symmetrically. The slide stop portion M1224b is formed
by a wall portion that is opened on a front face side and a top
face side, i.e., by a wall portion formed in a top-viewing L shape
that is protruded upward from an inside portion to a rear side
position. The slide stop portion M1224b has a function of stopping
the reel unit M11 at a predetermined position in the
forward/backward direction when the reel unit is slidably moved
from a front side. On the other hand, on a bottom face of the
second slide fixing portion M1224, insert portions M1224d, M1224d
that are opened at a front side are formed transversely
symmetrically.
[0311] In addition, coupling portions M1224c, M1224c are formed at
a rear end part of the second slide fixing portion M1224. The
coupling portions M1224c, M1224c are formed so as to protrude
obliquely downward from the second slide fixing portion M1224 to a
rear side. The coupling portions M1224c, M1224e, as shown in FIG.
16, has a function of engaging with the fixing hole M1211a that is
disposed a rear side of the flat plate portion M1211 in an
obliquely direction to thereby fix the slide retaining member M1221
to the reel unit support plate M121 in a vertical direction.
[0312] (Reel Unit M11)
[0313] The reel unit retaining mechanism M12 configured as
described above enables a reel unit M11 to be removably retained as
shown in FIG. 10. The reel unit M11 has: a reel M3 having symbols
501 arranged on an outer circumferential face of the reel; and a
reel support mechanism M6 configured to support the reel M3.
[0314] (Reel Unit M11: Reel Support Mechanism M6)
[0315] A reel support mechanism M6, as shown in FIG. 19, has a reel
support member M61 and a motor support member M62. The reel support
member M61 has a side face erected portion M63, a front face
erected portion M64, a rear face erected portion M65, and a support
bottom face portion M66. Each of these portions M63 to M66 is
formed by bending a flat plate. The support bottom face portion M66
is formed in a flat shape so as to be abutted with the reel unit
support plate M121 in a planar shape. A bottom face trough hole
M66a is formed in the support bottom face portion M66.
[0316] The bottom face through hole M66a, as shown in FIG. 20, is
formed in a rectangular shape. In addition, in the bottom face
through hole 66a, center protrusion portions M66b, M66b are formed
at a center part, and front side protrusion portions M66c, M66c are
formed at a front side part. Specifically, the bottom face through
hole M66a is slightly larger in size than an external dimension of
the slide retaining member M1221 described above, is formed in an
approximate opening shape, and is capable of inserting the slide
retaining member M1221 from a top side.
[0317] In this manner, after the slide retaining member M1221 has
been inserted through the bottom face through hole M66a of the
support bottom face portion M66, the center protrusion portion M66b
engages into a gap between the insert portion M1223e that is formed
on a bottom face of the first slide fixing portion M1223 of FIG. 15
and the reel unit support plate M121, and the front side protrusion
portion M66c engages into a gap between the insert portion M1224d
that is formed on a bottom face of the second slide fixing portion
M1224 of FIG. 15 and the reel unit support plate M121, whereby the
reel support member M61 is fixed to the reel unit support plate
M121 in a vertical direction.
[0318] A front face erected portion M64 is disposed at a front side
of the support bottom face portion M66. The front face erected
portion M64 is erected in a vertical direction relative to the
support bottom face portion M66. A front face through hole M64a is
formed in the support bottom face portion M66. The front face
through hole M64a, as shown in FIG. 18, is provided so that a
fixing protrusion portion M1223b is inserted and a protrusion
portion 1223f is abutted with a front face side of the front face
erected portion M64. In this manner, the reel support member M61,
as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 18, can be fixed in a vertical
direction and in a forward/backward direction without the reel
support member M61 being screw-tightened relative to the reel unit
support plate M121.
[0319] A rear face erected portion M65 is disposed at a rear side
of the support bottom face portion M66. A connector engagement hole
M65a is formed in the rear face erected portion M65. The connector
engagement hole M65a is disposed so as to be opposed to the
connector engagement hole M1214c of FIG. 13. The first connector
M124 of FIG. 18 described above is provided at a height position
and in the connector engagement hole M65a. In this manner, as shown
in FIG. 16 and FIG. 18, when the reel support member M61 is
slidably moved on the reel support plate M121 to a rear side, the
first connector M124 is connected to the second connector M123.
[0320] In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, a side face
erected portion M63 is disposed at a right side as viewed from a
front side of the support bottom face portion M66. The side face
erected portion M63 has: front face tilt portion M63a that is
tilted from a top end to a rear side of the front face erected
portion M64; an illumination mount portion M63b that is disposed
upward of the front face tilt portion M63a; a mounting cutout
portion M63c that is disposed at a rear side of the illumination
mount portion M63b; and a rear face tilt portion M63d that is
tilted from a rear side of the mounting cutout portion M63c to a
top end of the rear face erected portion M65.
[0321] In addition, on a left side face of the side face erected
portion M63, four board mount portions M63e are formed as shown in
FIG. 20. The board mount portions M63e are horizontally disposed so
as to retain a reel board M67 in parallel to the side face erected
portion M63, as shown in FIG. 21. The reel board M67 has a function
of controlling the reel device M1, and is electrically connected to
the first connector M124 via a signal line, although not shown. In
addition, an origin sensor M671 is provided on one face on the side
of the reel M3 of the reel board M67. The origin sensor M671
configures a part of a reel origin detecting mechanism configured
to output a reel origin signal.
[0322] On the other hand, the illumination mount portion M63b, as
shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, has: a backlight mount portion M63b1
configured to support a backlight device M7; and a rendering mount
portion M63b2 configured to support a rendering light emitting
device M8. The backlight mount portion M63b1 and the illumination
mount portion M63b are respectively disposed on a rear face side
and on a front face side. A widthwise dimension in the vertical
direction of the backlight mount portion M63b1 is greater than a
widthwise direction in the vertical direction of the rendering
mount portion M63b2. A rendering light fixing hole M63M4 is formed
at a center part of the rendering mount portion M63b2. In addition,
two backlight fixing holes M63b3, M63b3 are formed in the
illumination mount portion M63b. These backlight fixing holes
M63b3, M63b3 has a function of retaining a mount posture of the
backlight device M7.
[0323] In addition, a motor support member M62 is provided at a
mounting cutout portion M63c. The motor support member M62 is
erected in a leftward direction viewed from a front face side, and
has: erected portions M62a, M62a that are disposed longitudinally
symmetrically; and a flat face mount portion M62b that is
transversely provided between the erected portions M62a and M62a. A
reel motor M51 of FIG. 11 is provided on a left side face of the
flat face mount portion M62b. At a center part of the flat face
mount portion M62b, a circular through hole M62c is formed so as to
expose an end face of the reel motor M51 to the side of the
mounting cutout portion M63c. In the through hole M62c and at a
space portion surrounded by the erected portions M62a, M62a, an
encoder device M21 that is provided on an end face of the reel
motor M51 is disposed as shown in FIG. 11.
[0324] (Reel Unit M11: Reel Drive Mechanism M5 and Reel Angle
Detecting Mechanism M2)
[0325] The reel motor M51 described above configures a part of a
reel drive mechanism M5. The reel drive mechanism M5 is configured
so as to rearrange symbols 501 by rotationally driving reels M3.
Specifically, the reel drive mechanism M5 has: a reel motor M51
configured to impart a rotation drive force to the reels M3; and a
heat sink M52 configured to radiate a heat by increasing a surface
area of the reel motor M51.
[0326] The reel motor M51 is a stepping motor having a resolution
of 200, and is capable of controlling a rotation speed of a
rotation drive shaft M512 from a high speed rotation of 200 rpm or
the like to a low speed rotation of 12.5 rpm. The reel motor M51,
as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, has a motor bulkhead M511 formed
in a hollow columnar shape. On one end of the motor bulkhead M511,
a flange portion M511a is formed. The flange M511a, as shown in
FIG. 21 is fixedly provided on a flat face mount portion M62b of a
motor support member M62 by means of screw tightening. In addition,
a positioning portion M511b that is protruded in a circular shape
is formed at a center part of the flange portion M511a. The
positioning portion M511b, as shown in FIG. 22, is engaged into a
through hole M62c to thereby facilitate positioning at the time of
assembling that cause the rotation drive shaft M512 to coincide
with a rotation center of the reel M3 and to prevent a positional
shaft at the time of actuation.
[0327] In addition, one end part of the rotation drive shaft M512
is protruded as shown in FIG. 23 at a center part of the
positioning portion M511b. One end part of the rotation drive shaft
M512 is coupled with an encoder device M21. The encoder device M21
configures a part of a reel angle detecting mechanism M2. The
encoder device M21 includes: a reel interlock shaft, although not
shown, which is coupled with the rotation drive shaft M512 that
coincides with a rotation center of the reel M3; and a signal
output portion configured to magnetically detect rotation of the
reel interlock shaft, thereby outputting a magnetic force detection
signal, a position pulse signal, a origin pulse signal, and a phase
difference pulse signal.
[0328] In addition, a heat sink M52 is provided on a top face of
the motor bulkhead M511. The heat sink M52 is formed of a metal
with its high thermal conductivity such as aluminum or copper. The
heat sink M52 has a flat base portion M522 that is bonded with the
motor bulkhead M511 in a planar shape; and a plurality of fin
members M521 that are erected on a top face of the base portion
M522. In this manner, the heat sink M52 is capable of performing
cooling without a need to provide specific electrical wiring for
cooling the reel M3 by increasing a surface area of the reel motor
M51.
[0329] In addition, the other end part of the rotation drive shaft
M512 is protruded at the other end of the motor bulkhead M511. An
engagement ring-shape portion M512a is formed at a tip end part of
the rotation drive shaft M512. The engagement ring-shaped member
M512a, as shown in FIG. 11, enables a blade mechanism M4 and a
drive force transmission mechanism M9 to be fixed in an axial
direction by engaging a stop member M514. On the other hand, as
shown in FIG. 24, at a base portion of the rotation drive shaft
M512, two fixing members M513 are provided transversely
symmetrically around the rotation drive shaft M512. The fixing
member M513 is disposed in a vertical direction relative to the
rotation drive shaft M512. The fixing member M513 is configured to
fix the blade mechanism M4 and the drive force transmission
mechanism M9 to each other in a rotation direction and then fix the
reel M3 that is coupled with the drive force transmission mechanism
M9 in a rotation direction, thereby causing a rotation angle of the
reel M3 and a rotation angle of the rotation drive shaft M512 to
coincide with each other.
[0330] (Reel Unit M11: Blade Mechanism M4 and Drive Force
Transmission Mechanism M9)
[0331] The blade mechanism M4 and the drive force transmission
mechanism M9 to be coupled with the reel motor M51 configured as
described above are provided by means of a rotor 90 that is
integrally formed of a resin, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26. The
rotor 90 has: a first ring-shaped portion M91 that is disposed on
one end side of a left side as viewed from a front side; a second
ring-shaped portion M92 that is disposed at the other end side; and
a third ring-shaped portion 93 that is disposed between the first
ring-shaped portion M91 and the second ring-shaped portion M92. The
first ring-shaped portion M91, the second ring-shaped portion M92,
and the third ring-shaped portion M93 are respectively formed in a
circular ring shape, and a center shaft is caused to coincide with
a rotation center of the reel M3. A reel motor M51 or the like of
the reel drive mechanism M5 in FIG. 11 is disposed on an inner
circumferential side of each of the second ring-shaped portion M92
and the third ring-shaped portion 93.
[0332] A cutout portion M921 is partially formed in the second
ring-shaped portion M92. The cutout portion M921 configures a reel
origin detecting mechanism together with an origin sensor M671 of
FIG. 21. The cutout portion M921 is detected by means of the origin
sensor M671 to thereby able to output a reel origin signal. The
third ring-shaped portion 93 has a plurality of first blade
portions M931 (blade mechanisms M4) on an inner circumferential
face thereof. The first blade portion M931 is formed in a wavy
shape from its outer circumferential side to its inner
circumferential side. In this manner, the first blade portion M931
is configured to distribute air in a rotation center direction and
then cool the reel drive mechanism M5 when the blade portion is
swiveled around its rotation center.
[0333] In addition, an inner circumferential ring-shaped portion
M912 is disposed on an inner circumferential side of the first
ring-shaped portion M91. A plurality of second blade portions M911
(blade mechanisms M4) are formed between the first ring-shaped
portion M91 and the inner circumferential ring-shaped portion M912.
The second blade portions M911 are formed in a state in which they
tilt from an end face of the first ring-shaped portion M91 to the
side of the third ring-shaped portion 93. In this manner, the
second blade portions M911 are swiveled around its rotation center
to thereby distribute external air on the end face of the first
ring-shaped portion M91 to the inner circumferential side of the
third ring-shaped portion 93 and then cool the reel drive mechanism
M5.
[0334] Further, an inner circumferential support portion M913
formed in a crossed shape and a through hole M914 formed at a
center part of the inner circumferential support portion M913 are
disposed on the inner circumferential side of the inner
circumferential ring-shaped portion M912. The through hole M914 is
caused to coincide with the rotation center of the reel M3. The
through hole M914 is configured to insert the rotation drive shaft
M512 of the reel motor M51 in FIG. 24. A fixing engagement portion
M915 is formed on a wall face on the inner circumferential side of
the third ring-shaped portion 93 in the inner circumferential
support portion M913. The fixing engagement portion M915 enables
fixing in a rotation direction between the rotation drive shaft
M512 and the rotor 90 by allowing the fixing member M513 of FIG. 24
to be engaged therewith.
[0335] (Reel Unit M11: Reel M3)
[0336] On the rotor 90 described above, a reel M3 is provided as
shown in FIG. 27. The reel M3 has: a ring-shaped reel band M32 on
which one or more symbols 501 are arranged; and a reel frame member
M31 in which the reel band M32 is provided on an outer
circumferential face and a blade mechanism M4 in a rotor 90 is
disposed on an inner circumferential side. In this manner, the reel
M3 prevents upsizing exerted by providing a cooling function for a
reel motor M51 by defining the inner circumferential side of the
reel frame member M31 as a mount site of the blade mechanism
M4.
[0337] The reel frame member M31 described above, as shown in FIG.
28, has: a driving-side reel frame member M311 configured to retain
one end part of the reel band M32; a follower-side reel frame
member M312 configured to retain the other end part of the reel
band M32; and a frame member coupling member 313 configured to
couple the outer circumferential portions of the driving-side reel
frame body M311 and the follower-side reel frame reel M312 to each
other. The reel frame member M31 that is formed by these members is
formed of a light transmission material.
[0338] In this manner, the reel M3 is capable of assembling the
reel frame member M31 by coupling the reel frame member M31 via a
frame member coupling member 313 from a state in which the reel is
divided into two sections, the driving-side reel frame member M311
and the follower-side reel frame member M312; and therefore, a
width of the reel frame member M31, i.e., a width of the reel M3
including the reel frame member M31 and the reel band M32 can be
easily changed merely by changing a length of the frame member
coupling member 313.
[0339] The driving-side reel frame member M311 has an inner
circumferential ring-shaped portion M3111. The inner
circumferential ring-shaped portion M3111 is engaged with and is
fixed to an outer circumferential face of the first ring-shaped
portion M91. In this manner, the reel M3 is coupled in a state in
which the reel coincides with the rotation center of the rotor
90.
[0340] On the other hand, the follower-side reel frame member M312
has a reel band engagement portion M312a that engages with an end
part of the reel band M32. Similarly, the driving-side reel frame
member M311, as shown in FIG. 29, has a reel band engagement
portion M311a that engages with an end part of the reel band M32.
In this manner, the reel M3 is capable of easily assembling the
reel band M32 with the reel frame M31 by engaging both end parts of
the reel band M32 with each other so as to be sandwiched from both
sides between the reel band engagement portions M311a and M312a of
the driving-side frame member M311 and the follower-side reel frame
member M312 on the way of assembling the reel frame member M31 by
coupling the reel frame member M31 via the frame member coupling
member 313 from a state in which the reel is divided into two
sections, the driving-side reel frame member M311 and the
follower-side reel frame member M312.
[0341] The reel band engagement portions M311a and M312a described
above, as shown in FIG. 30, are formed so as to engage the entire
circumference of the reel band M32. In this manner, the reel frame
member M31 is configured to hold the entire circumference of the
reel band M32 to thereby able to enhance shape sustainability when
the reel band M32 has been retained by means of the reel frame
member M31.
[0342] In addition, the frame member coupling member 313 is
disposed to able to support a back face of the reel band M32. In
this manner, it becomes possible to further enhance shape
sustainability when the reel band M32 is retained by means of the
reel frame member M31. Further, the reel band M32 is formed of a
material such as an acrylic resin that is capable of transmitting
illumination light.
[0343] (Reel Unit M11: Backlight Device M7)
[0344] As shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, a backlight device M7 is
arranged on the inner circumferential side of the reel M3
configured as described above. The backlight device M7 is arranged
so as to emit illumination light from the inner circumferential
side of the reel M3 into the direction of the reel band M32 and
then allow the emitted light having transmitted the reel band M32
to be visually recognized from the outside of a slot machine
10.
[0345] Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 as well, the
backlight device M7 has: a backlight source unit M70; and a board
case support member M74 that is provided in a reel support
mechanism M6 and is configured to removably support the backlight
source unit M70. Four backlight source units M70 are disposed in a
vertical direction. These backlight source units M70 are disposed
and set at intervals so that the backlight source units are opposed
to symbols 501. That is, a positional relationship between the
backlight units M70 and the symbols 501 are set so that they exist
on a line segment passing through the rotation center of the reel
M3 in a vertical direction. In this manner, illumination light can
be transmitted from the reel band M32 and the transparent reel
frame member M31 while each of the backlight source units M70
illuminates each of the symbols 501 opposed thereto.
[0346] The respective backlight source units M70 described above
has a plurality of illumination light sources M71 that are arranged
in a widthwise direction and in a longitudinal direction of the
reel band M32 and that is capable of changing a light quantity when
illumination light is emitted. In this manner, the backlight device
M7 is capable of individually controlling an emission mode of
illumination light in each of the illumination light sources M71,
and is capable of enhancing a degree of freedom in rendering with
the use of illumination light.
[0347] In addition, the backlight source unit M70 has: a backlight
board M72 on which the illumination light source M71 is provided
and then is disposed to opposed to the reel band M32; and a
backlight board case M73 configured to retain the backlight board
M72. The backlight board case M73 is removably supported on a board
case support member M74. In other words, the reel device M1 has a
backlight board M72, a backlight board case M73, and a board case
support member M74 configured to removably support the backlight
board case M73.
[0348] In this manner, the backlight device M7 is capable of coping
with a change of a reel width merely by exchanging the backlight
source unit M70 (the backlight board M72 and the board case support
member M74) without a need to exchange the entire backlight device
M7 when there occurs a need to change a size of the backlight board
M72 in accordance with a change of a reel width of the reel band
M32, for example, because the backlight board case M73 configured
to retain the backlight board M72 is removable from the board case
support member M74. That is, the backlight device M7 is capable of
performing a work of changing the side of the backlight board M72
easily and within a short period of time.
[0349] Further, the board case support member M74 has an engagement
portion M741 and a protrusion portion M742 on a base side of the
other side of a mount position of the backlight source unit M70.
The engagement portion M741 and the protrusion portion M742, as
shown in FIG. 31, is removably coupled by engaging with the
backlight mount portion M63b1 of the reel support member M61.
[0350] The backlight board case M73 that is removably supported on
the board case support member M74, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35
as well, has a plate-shaped member M731 that is disposed at one end
in a reel widthwise direction, and is formed so as to abut with the
board case support member M74 in a planar shape; and a claw member
M732 that is protruded to be elastically deformable from the
plate-shaped member M731 in the direction of the board case support
member M74. On the other hand, the board case support member M74
has: an engagement portion M741 configured to slidably engage both
end parts of the plate-shaped member M731 with each other when the
plate-shaped member M731 is abutted in a planar shape; and an
engagement hole M742 in which the claw member M732 is engaged when
the plate-shaped member M731 is engaged with the engagement portion
M741.
[0351] In this manner, the backlight device M7 is capable of
respectively coupling the backlight board case M73 and the board
case support member M74 with the engagement portion M741 and the
engagement hole M742 by allowing both end parts of the plate-shaped
member M731 to be slidably engaged with the engagement portion M741
when the plate-shaped member M731 has been abutted in a planar
shape and allowing the claw member M732 of the plate-shaped member
M731 to be engaged into the engagement hole M742. On the other
hand, the backlight device M7 is capable of removing the backlight
board case M73 from the board case support member M74 if an
external force of elastically deforming the claw member M732 is
applied to the backlight board case M73. As a result, the backlight
device M7 is capable of easily mounting or removing the backlight
source unit M70 relative to the board case support member M74.
[0352] (Reel Unit M11: Rendering Light Emitting Device M8)
[0353] In addition, as shown in FIG. 11, a rendering light emitting
device M8 is disposed lateral of a reel M3. The rendering light
emitting device M8 is configured to emit a plurality of rendering
light beams so as to be visually recognizable from the outside of a
slot machine 10. In this manner, the rendering light emitting
device M8 is capable of enhancing a rendering effect and a degree
of freedom in rendering at the time of rotation of the reel M3 or
at the time of rearranging symbols 501.
[0354] The rendering light emitting device M8 described above, as
shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, has at least a plurality of rendering
light sources M81 that are arranged along a longitudinal direction
of a reel band M32. These rendering light sources M81 are
individually controllable and are capable of changing a light
quantity when rendering light is emitted in a plurality of steps.
In this manner, the rendering light emitting device M8 is capable
of enhancing a rendering effect and a degree of freedom in
rendering at the time of rotation of the reel M3 or at the time of
rearranging symbols 501.
[0355] Specifically, each of the rendering light emitting devices
M8 has: a rendering light source unit M80; and a unit support
member M83 that is provided in the reel support mechanism M6, and
is configured to removably support the rendering light source unit
M80. The rendering light source unit M80 has: a hollow-shaped board
case M82; a rendering light board M84 that is housed in the board
case M82; and rendering light sources M81 that are disposed in one
column on a top face of the rendering light board M84.
[0356] The board case M82 is formed in a fan shape so as to have a
curved face that is identical to an outer circumferential face of a
ring-shaped reel M3. In addition, the board case M82 is formed of a
material for transmitting light on at least a front face side. The
rendering light board M84 is curved at a curvature radius that is
identical to that of the board case M82. In this manner, each of
the rendering light sources M81 on the rendering light board M84 is
provided so that a distance from a top face of the board case M82
is identical.
[0357] A unit support member M83 is disposed at an end part on the
inner circumferential side of the board case M82 described above.
The unit support member M83 is provided removably from a side face
erected portion M63 of the reel support mechanism M6. Specifically,
the unit support member M83 has: a plate-shaped member M831 that is
formed so as to abut with a rendering mount portion M63b2 in a
planar shape; an engagement portion M833 that is slidably engage
both end parts of the rendering mount portion M63b2 with each other
when the plate-shaped member M831 is abutted in a planar shape; and
a claw member M832 that is protruded to be elastically deformable
from the plate-shaped member M831 in the direction of the rendering
mount portion M63b2, and that can be engaged into a rendering light
fixing hole M63b4.
[0358] In this manner, the rendering light emitting device M8 is
capable of coupling the rendering light emitting device M8 and a
reel support member M61 with each other by allowing both end parts
of the rendering mount portion M63b2 to be slidably engaged with an
engagement portion M833 when the plate-shaped member M831 has been
abutted with the rendering mount portion M63b2 in a planar shape
and allowing the claw member M832 to be engaged with the rendering
mount portion M63b2. On the other hand, the rendering light
emitting device M8 is capable of removing the rendering light
emitting device M8 from the reel support member M61 if an external
force of elastically deforming the claw member M832 is applied. As
a result, the rendering light emitting device M8 is capable of
being easily mounted or removed relative to the reel support member
M61 of the reel support mechanism M6.
[0359] (Electronic Configuration of Slot Machine)
[0360] Next, a configuration of a circuit included in a slot
machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 38.
[0361] A gaming board 50 includes: a CPU 51, a ROM 52, and a boot
ROM 53 that are interconnected by means of an internal bus; a card
slot 55 that corresponds to a memory car 54; and an IC socket 57
that corresponds to a GAL (Generic Array Logic) 56.
[0362] The memory card 54 is made of a nonvolatile memory, and
stores game programs and game system programs. The game programs
include a program relating to the progress of a game and a program
for executing rendering by means of image or sound. In addition,
the game programs include a symbol determination program. The
symbol determination program is a program for determining symbols
to be rearranged as symbols 501.
[0363] In addition, the game programs include: symbol table data
for normal game indicating a correlation between each symbol of
each symbol array, in a display block, a code No., a random numeric
value; a symbol table data for bonus game indicating a symbol table
for bonus game indicating a correlation between each symbol of each
symbol table in a display block, code No., and a random numeric
value; a symbol No. determination table data indicating a symbol
array determination table; a code No. determination table data
indicating a symbol array determination table; a wild symbol
increment determination table indicating a wild symbol increment
determination table; a trigger symbol increment determination table
data indicating a trigger symbol increment determination table; and
odds data indicating a correlation between types and the number of
symbols that are rearranged on a pay line and a prize amount or the
like.
[0364] In addition, the card slot 55 is configured to be able to
insert or removing a memory card 54, and is connected to a
motherboard 70 by means of an IDE bus. Therefore, the memory card
54 is removed from the card slot 53S, another game program is
written in the memory card 54, and then, the memory card 54 is
inserted into a card slot 53S, whereby types or contents of games
to be played in a slot machine 10 can be changed.
[0365] The GAL 56 is one kind of PLD (Programmable Logic Device)
having an OR-fixed type array structure. The GAL 56 includes a
plurality of input ports and output ports, and outputs
corresponding data from an output port if a predetermined input
occurs in an input port.
[0366] In addition, the IC socket 57 is configured to be able to
mount or remove the GAL 56, and is connected to the motherboard 70
by means of a PCI bus. The memory card 54 is replaced with another
one in which another program is written, or alternatively, the
program that is written in the memory card 54 is rewritten into
another one, whereby the contents of a play to be played in a slot
machine 10 can be changed.
[0367] The CPU 51, the ROM 52, and the boot ROM 53 that are
interconnected by means of the internal bus are connected to the
motherboard 70 by means of the PCI bus. The PCI bus transmits a
signal between the motherboard 70 and the gaming board 50, and
supplies electric power from the motherboard 70 to the gaming board
50.
[0368] An authentication program is stored in the ROM 52. A
preliminary authentication program and a program (a boot code) for
the CPU 51 to start up the preliminary authentication program or
the like are stored in the boot ROM 53.
[0369] The authentication program is a program (tampering check
program) for authenticating a game program and a game system
program. The preliminary authentication program is a program for
authenticating the authentication program described above. The
authentication program and the preliminary authentication program
are described along a procedure (an authentication procedure) for
authenticating the fact that a target program is not tampered.
[0370] The motherboard 70 is configured using a commercially
available general purpose motherboard (a printed wiring board
implementing basic parts of a personal computer), and includes a
main CPU 71, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, a RAM (RANDOM Access
Memory) 73, and a communication interface 82. The motherboard 70 is
equivalent to a game controller 100 in the embodiment.
[0371] The ROM 72 is made of a memory device such as a flash
memory, and stores programs such as a BIOS (a Basic Input/Output
System) to be executed by means of the main CPU 71 and permanent
data. When the BIOS is executed by means of the main CPU 71,
initialization processing of predetermined peripheral devices is
performed. In addition, acquisition processing of the game programs
and game system programs that are stored in the memory card 54 is
started via the gaming board 50. In the present invention, the ROM
72 may be the one of which the contents are rewritable or are not
rewritable.
[0372] The RAM 73 stores data employed when the main CPU 71
operates or programs such as a symbol determination program. For
example, when the acquisition processing of the game programs and
game system programs or authentication program described previously
has been performed, these programs can be stored. In addition, a
work region for executing the programs described above is provided
in the RAM 73. For example, there are provided a region for storing
a counter managing the number of games played, the number of BETs,
the number of payouts, or the number of credits, for example, or a
region for storing symbols (code numbers) that are determined by
means of lottery.
[0373] The communication interface 82 is configured to make
communication with an external control device 621 such as a server
via a communication line 301. In addition, a door PCB (Printed
Circuit Board) 90 and a main PCB 110 to be described later are
respectively connected to the motherboard 70 by means of a USB. In
addition, a power unit 81 is connected to the motherboard 70.
Further, a PTS terminal 700 is connected to the motherboard 70 by
means of the USB.
[0374] When electric power is supplied from the power unit 81 to
the motherboard 70, the main CPU 71 of the motherboard 70 is
started up, and electric power is supplied to the gaming board 50
via the PCI bus and then the CPU 51 is started up.
[0375] Input devices such as switches or sensors or peripheral
devices whose operations are controlled by means of the main CPU 71
are respectively connected to the door PCB 90 and the main PCB
110.
[0376] A control panel 30, a reverter 91, a coin counter 92C, and a
cold cathode-ray tube 93 are respectively connected to the door PCB
90.
[0377] On the control panel 30, in association with the respective
buttons described previously, there are provided: a reserve switch
31S; a collect switch 32S; a game rule switch 33S; a 1-BET switch
34S; a 2-BETS switch 35S; a 3-BETS switch 37S; a 5-BETS switch 385;
a 10-BETS switch 39S; a PLAY 2 LINES switch 40S; a PLAY 10 LINES
switch 41S; a PLAY 20 LINES switch 42S; a PLAY 40 LINES switch 43S;
a MAX LINES switch 44S; a gamble switch 45S; and a start switch
46S. Each switch detects that a corresponding button has been
pressed by a player, and outputs a signal to the main CPU 71.
[0378] The reverter 91 and the coin counter 92C are provided inside
of the coin entry 36. Then, the reverter 91 identifies whether or
not a coin inserted into the coin entry 36 is legitimate, and
ejects a coin other than a legitimate coin from a coin payout exit.
In addition, the coin counter 92C detects the accepted legitimate
coins and counts the number of these coins.
[0379] The reverter 91 operates based on a control signal that is
output from the main CPU 71, and distributes the legitimate coins
that are screened by the coin counter 92C into a hopper 113 or a
cashbox (not shown). In a case where the holler 113 is not filled
with coins, they are distributed to the hopper 113, or
alternatively, in a case where the hopper 113 is filled with coins,
they are distributed to the cashbox.
[0380] The cold cathode-ray tube 93 functions as a backlight that
is installed at a rear face side of an upper image display panel
131, and lights based on a control signal that is output from the
main CPU 71.
[0381] A lamp 111, a speaker 112, a hopper 113, a coin detecting
portion 113S, a bill entry 22, a graphic board 130, a key switch
173S, and a data display 174 are respectively connected to the main
PCB 110.
[0382] The lamp 111 lights based on a control signal that is output
from the main CPU 71. The speaker 112 outputs a sound such as BGM
based on a control signal that is output from the main CPU 71.
[0383] The hopper 113 operates based on a control signal that is
output from the main CPU 71 and then pays out coins whose payout
number is specified from the coin payout exit to a coin tray,
although not shown. The coin detecting portion 113S detects the
coins to be paid out by means of the hopper 113 and then outputs a
signal to the main CPU 71.
[0384] A touch panel may be provided on a front face of a reel
device M1. The touch panel detects a position that touched by a
player's finger and then outputs a signal that corresponds to the
detected position to the main CPU 71.
[0385] The bill entry 22 is configured to identify whether or not a
bill is legitimate and accept a legitimate bill in the cabinet 11.
Then, the bill entered in the cabinet 11 is converted to the number
of coins, and credits equivalent to the number of coins converted
are added as the player owned credits.
[0386] The graphic board 130 controls an image to be displayed by
means of the upper image display panel 131, based on a control
signal that is output from the main CPU 71. The graphic board 130
includes a VDP (a Video Display Processor) configured to generate
image data or a video RAM configured to store the image data that
is generated by means of the VDP. The image data employed when the
image data is generated by means of the VDP is included in the game
programs that are read out from the memory card 54 and are stored
in the RAM 73.
[0387] The graphic board 130 includes a VDP (a Video Display
Processor) configured to generate image data, based on a control
signal that is output from the main CPU 71, or a video RAM or the
like configured to temporarily store the image data that is
generated by means of the VDP. The image data employed when the
image data is generated by means of the VDP is included in the game
programs that are read out from the memory card 54 and are stored
in the RAM 73.
[0388] The key switch 1735 is provided in a keypad 173, and when
the keypad 173 is operated by a player, a predetermined signal is
output to the main CPU 71.
[0389] The data display 174 displays the data that a card reader
172 has read based on a control signal that is output from the main
CPU 71 or the data that is input by a player via the keypad
173.
[0390] In addition, a backlight 164 of an expectation value meter
160 is electrically connected to the main PCB 110. As described
above, the backlight 164 is made of a full-color LED (a light
emitting diode). The full-color LED can be configured so as to be
made of a plurality of LED elements. In accordance with a
processing operation of FIG. 93 to be described later, the main CPU
71 determines a light emission color indicating a degree of
expectation and the size of a light emitting region, and a signal
indicating the determined light emission color and the size of the
light emitting region is transmitted to the backlight 164 via the
main PCB 110.
[0391] (Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine: Reel Device
M1)
[0392] A reel device M1 is connected to the main PCB 110 described
above. The reel device M1, as shown in FIG. 11 has five reel units,
i.e., first to fifth reel units M11a to M11e. As shown in FIG. 39,
each of the first to fifth reel units M11a to M11e has a reel board
M67. The reel board M67 has: an input/output portion M675 that is
connected to the main PCB 110 to enable data communication; a reel
drive portion M672 that is connected to the input/output portion
M675; a backlight drive portion M673; and a rendering device drive
portion M674.
[0393] A magnetic force detecting mechanism M202 is connected to
the input/output portion M675. The magnetic force detecting
mechanism M202 has: a magnetic force sensor configured to output a
magnetic force detection signal of output intensity in accordance
with a magnetic force; and a sensor fixing mechanism configured to
fix the magnetic force sensor at a predetermined position. The
magnetic force detecting mechanism M202 is coupled with a rotary
shaft of a reel motor M51 so as to thereby output a magnetic force
detection signal by detecting a magnetic force in an external
magnetic field by means of a magnet M201 of FIG. 1 that rotates
together with a reel M3.
[0394] The reel drive portion M672 is connected so as to supply
drive power to the reel motor M51. The backlight drive portion M673
is connected so as to individually supply drive power to each
illumination light source M71 of the backlight device M7. The
rendering device drive portion M674 is connected so as to
individually supply drive power to each rendering light source M81
of the rendering light emitting device M8.
[0395] (Electrical Configuration of PTS Terminal)
[0396] Next, a configuration of a circuit included in a PTS
terminal 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
[0397] A PTS controller 720 configured to control the PTS terminal
700 has a CPU 731, a communication portion 734, a ROM 733, and a
RAM 732 while a variety of functional portions are connected around
a unit controller 730.
[0398] The CPU 731 executes or computes a variety of programs that
are stored in the ROM 733 to be described later. In particular, the
CPU 731 executes a credit update program, converts credit data that
acquired from a game controller 100 to money data, sums the
converted money data with fraction money data contained in a
management server 800, and then, transmits the summed data to an IC
card 500.
[0399] In addition, the CPU 731 executes a human body detection
actuating program and then determines whether or not to take the IC
card 500 in a card stacker 714 with the use of human body detecting
cameras 712 and 713 in a case where the number of credits based on
the credit data that is acquired from the game controller 100 is
not set to "0".
[0400] Further, the CPU 731 executes an authentication program and
then correlate an identification code contained in the IC card 500
and an identification code contained in the management server 800
with each other.
[0401] Furthermore, the CPU 731 executes a voice control program
and then controls a voice control circuit portion 724 to be
described later, based on an authentication result. The voice
control used here designates a control that in a case where
authentication fails, the CPU 731 controls the voice control
circuit portion 724 to be described later and then broadcasts that
such authentication fails from speakers 707 and 708. The
communication portion 734 enables communication with the game
controller 100.
[0402] Still furthermore, the CPU 731 executes a device program and
then actuates and controls an LCD 719, microphones 704 and 705, and
the speakers 707 and 708. Further, the CPU 731 executes an LED
control program and then controls an LED718 to light in accordance
with a remaining number of IC cards 500.
[0403] The ROM 733 is made of a memory device such as a flash
memory, and stores permanent data to be executed by means of the
CPU 731. For example, the ROM 733 has: a credit update program
configured to rewrite the credit data that is stored in the IC card
500 in accordance with a command from the game controller 100; a
human body detection actuating program; an authentication program;
a voice control program, a device program; and an LED control
program.
[0404] The RAM 732 temporarily stores data required to execute a
variety of programs that are stored in the ROM 733. For example,
the RAM 732 stores the credit data to be updated, based on a signal
from the game controller 100. In addition, the RAM 732 stores a
time when a player has been detected by means of the human body
detecting cameras 712 and 713 and a time to be counted from that
time point.
[0405] In addition, the unit controller 730 is connected to a human
body detecting camera control portion 722, an LCD drive portion
723, a voice control circuit portion 724, a remaining card
recognition input portion 727, a card entry/ejection drive portion
726, a card detection input portion 725, an LED drive portion 728,
and a modulation/demodulation portion 721.
[0406] The human body detecting camera control portion 722 actuates
and controls the human body detecting cameras 712 and 713 based on
a command from the unit controller 730.
[0407] The LCD drive portion 723 actuates and controls the LCD 719
based on a command from the unit controller 730.
[0408] The voice control circuit portion 724 actuates and controls
the microphones 704 and 705 and the speakers 707 and 708 based on a
command from the unit controller 730.
[0409] The remaining card recognition input portion 727 inputs to
the unit controller 730 a signal for determining a remaining number
of IC cards 500 that are stacked in the card stacker 714 by means
of a remaining card recognition sensor 717. The remaining card
recognition sensor 717 used herein has a function of determining a
remaining number of IC cards 500 that are stacked in the card
stacker 714 with the use of an infrared-ray detecting mechanism,
although not shown, for example.
[0410] The card entry/ejection drive portion 726 drives and
controls a card entry/ejection mechanism 716 based on a command
from the unit controller 730. The card entry/ejection mechanism 716
used here has a mechanism of taking an IC card 500 to the inside
and a mechanism of ejection the taken IC card to the outside.
[0411] The card detection input portion 725 inputs a signal from a
card detecting sensor 715 to the unit controller 730. The card
detecting sensor 715 used here acquires a variety of data such as
money data from the inserted IC card 500 or identification
codes.
[0412] The LED drive portion 728 drives and controls an LED 718 to
light, based on a command from the unit controller 730.
[0413] The modulation or demodulation portion 721 converts a high
frequency signal from an antenna 701 to a signal that the unit
controller 730 can control, whereas this portion converts a signal
from the unit controller 730 to a signal that can be transmitted to
the IC card 500, via the antenna 701.
[0414] The unit controller 730, the card entry/ejection drive
portion 726, the card detection input portion 725, and the
modulation/demodulation portion 721 described previously are also
referred to as a card unit control controller altogether.
[0415] (Electrical Configuration of IC Card)
[0416] Next, a configuration of a circuit included in an IC card
500 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 and FIG. 41.
[0417] The IC card 500 has an antenna 507, a power control circuit
504, a modulation/demodulation circuit 508, a display write IC 505,
a display driver 506, and a display portion 510.
[0418] The antenna 507 transmits or receives a variety of signals
via the antenna 701 that the PTS terminal 700 has.
[0419] The power control circuit 504 has a second voltage increase
circuit 531 and a third voltage increase circuit 532. The second
voltage increase circuit 531 increases the intensity of a signal
from the antenna 507 up to a voltage that the
modulation/demodulation circuit 508 to be described later can
process. The third voltage increase circuit 532 increases a voltage
from a power source up to a voltage for driving the display driver
506 to be described later.
[0420] The modulation/demodulation circuit 508 has a signal
generator 521 and a waveform detector circuit 522. The signal
generator 521 outputs a signal of a specific frequency and then
mixes the output signal with a signal that is received from the
antenna 507 to thereby convert the mixed signal to a signal that
the display write IC 505 to be described later can process. The
waveform detector circuit 522 detects the signal that is received
from the antenna 507 as a waveform.
[0421] The display write IC 505 has a CPU 553, a credit data memory
552, and a display controller 551.
[0422] The CPU 553 executes a money data rewrite update program and
then rewrites and updates the money data that is stored in the
credit data memory 552, based on the money data that is acquired
from the PTS terminal 700.
[0423] In addition, the CPU 553 controls the display controller
551, causes the money data that is stored in the credit data memory
552 to be used as a display data, and then, causes the display
portion 510 to display the data via a display driver 506 to be
described later.
[0424] The credit data memory 552 stores: the aforementioned money
data rewrite update program; and credit-related data such as money
data, identification codes, and display money data. The items of
the credit-related data that are stored in the credit data memory
552 are used for computation or for display.
[0425] The display controller 551 acquires the display credit data
that is stored in the credit data memory 552, based on a CPU 553
control signal, and then, causes the display portion 510 to display
the acquired data via the display driver 506.
[0426] An IC card 500 has a communication IC 509. The communication
IC 509 has: a first voltage increase circuit 543; a signal
generator 546; a waveform detector circuit 545; a transmission
control portion 544; a CPU 542, and an authentication memory 541.
The first voltage increase circuit 543 increases terminal-side
authentication data that is acquired from the PTS terminal 700 up
to a voltage that the CPU 542 to be described later can
process.
[0427] The signal generator 546 outputs a signal of a specific
frequency and then mixes the output signal with a signal that is
received from the antenna 507 to thereby convert the mixed signal
to a signal that the CPU 542 can process. The waveform detector
circuit 522 detects the signal that is received from the antenna
507 as a waveform.
[0428] The CPU 542 executes an authentication routine program and
then transmits to the PTS terminal 700 an identification code that
is stored in the authentication memory 541 to be described later,
when an authentication request from the PTS terminal 700 occurs.
The authentication memory 541 stores the authentication routine
program that the CPU 542 uses and the identification code.
[0429] (Symbols, Combinations or the Like)
[0430] Symbols 301 that are displayed in display windows 7A, 7B,
7C, 7D, and 7E of the slot machine 10 described above form a symbol
array by means of 22 symbols. Any code number of 0 to 21 is
assigned to any of symbols configuring each symbol array, as shown
in FIG. 42. Each symbol array is configured by allowing "JACKPOT
7", "BLUE 7", "BELL", "CHERRY", "STRAWBERRY", "PLUM", "ORANGE", and
"APPLE" symbols to be combined with each other.
[0431] Three continuous symbols in symbol arrays are displayed
(arranged) at a respective one of an upper stage 7a, a middle stage
7b, and a lower stage 7c of each of the display windows 7A, 7B, 7C,
7D, and 7E, whereby a symbol matrix of five columns and three lines
are configured in the display windows 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, and 7E. The
symbols configuring the symbol matrix starts scrolling when a game
is started, if a start button is depressed after a BET button has
been depressed. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed
after scrolling has been started, scrolling of the respective
symbols stops (are rearranged).
[0432] In addition, a variety of winning combinations are
predetermined as to the respective symbols. A winning combination
designates that a combination in a state in which a combination of
symbols having stopped on a pay line is advantageous to a player. A
word "advantageous state" designates a state such as a state in
which coins according to a winning combination is paid out, a state
in which the payout number of coins is added to credits, a state in
which a bonus game is started.
[0433] Specifically, a bonus trigger is established when a
combination of "APPLE" symbols has stopped on a pay line and then
the play state migrates from a basic game to a bonus game. In
addition, in a basic game, in a case where a combination of
"CHERRY" symbols has stopped on a pay line, payout of twenty coins
per 1 BET (variable values) is performed. In addition, in a basic
game, in a case where a combination of "PLUM" symbols has stopped
on a pay line, payout of five coins per 1 BET is performed.
[0434] A bonus game is a play state that is more advantageous than
in a basic game In addition, if a play state is advantageous to a
player, i.e., if a play state is more advantageous than in a basic
game, another bonus game may be employed together. For example, as
another bonus game, there can be employed: a state in which more
coins can be acquired than in a basic game, a state in which coins
can be acquired at a higher probability than in a basic game, a
state in which lesser coins are consumed than in a basic game; or a
free game and the like.
[0435] (Prize Management Table)
[0436] FIG. 43 shows a prize management table for managing a prize
to be awarded based on a winning combination. This prize management
table is stored in a ROM 242 of a main control board 71, and items
of prize information are associated with types of winning
combination. For example, a prize corresponding to a "BELL" winning
combination is "10". A prize corresponding to a "BLUE 7" winning
combination is "40". In the embodiment, prizes in a basic game and
in a free game are set to be equal to each other in amount.
[0437] (Number-of-Free-Games Table)
[0438] FIG. 44 shows a table to be referred to when determining the
number of free games relative to the number of points that is
acquired in a common game in a basic game. In the
number-of-free-games table, the number of points that is awarded in
a common game is associated with the number of free games. For
example, in a case where the number of cumulative points is "4",
"80" free games are executed. In addition, in a case where the
number of cumulative points is "8", "160" free games are executed.
In this manner, a result of a common game is successful in a basic
game and then more points are acquired, whereby a free game can be
continued longer.
[0439] (Reel Setting Table and Magnetic Force Detection Value
Table)
[0440] FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing a relationship
between a reel setting table and a magnetic force detection value
table in a case where a symbol array, a reel origin, and a magnetic
detection value are associated with each other. The reel setting
table has a code number field, a symbol array field, and a magnetic
force detection value field. There exist five kinds of reel setting
tables for first to fifth symbol arrays. FIG. 45 shows a reel
setting table for the first symbol array. The reel setting table
for the first symbol array shows that when a site of a reel M3 at
which a "BLUE 7" symbol of code number "08" has been arranged is
defined as a reel origin position, a magnetic force detection value
(a reel origin magnetic force value) at the reel origin position is
"ND78", and shows a state of assigning a magnetic signal pattern
made of a magnetic force detection value for one reel rotation (for
one cycle) relative to symbols of all code numbers. In this manner,
the reel setting table is capable of specifying rearranged symbols
by reading each magnetic force detection value of a magnetic force
signal pattern.
[0441] In addition, the magnetic force detection value table is a
table for storing a magnetic force detection value obtained by
numerically defining a magnetic force detection signal when the
magnetic force detection signal is obtained by detecting a magnetic
force in an external magnetic field when a reel M3 is rotated. That
is, the magnetic force detection value table is capable of storing
a magnetic force detection value of a magnetic signal pattern of
one cycle or more. For example, in a case where a site of a reel M3
at which a "BLUE 7" symbols of code number "08" has been arranged
is set or selected as a reel origin position, if a magnetic force
detection value (a reel origin magnetic force value) obtained when
an external command signal has been input is "ND78", a magnetic
force signal pattern is stored in a magnetic force detection value
field so that the "ND78" is stored in the magnetic force detection
value field that corresponds to code number "08" of the reel
setting table.
[0442] (Processing Operation of Slot Machine 10: Startup
Processing)
[0443] Next, startup processing to be performed in a slot machine
10 will be described. When power is supplied to the slot machine, a
startup processing routine shown in FIG. 46 is executed on a
motherboard 240 and a gaming board 250. In the embodiment, it is
assumed that a memory card 253 is inserted into a card slot 253S of
the gaming board 250 and then a GAL 254 is mounted on an IC socket
254S.
[0444] First, when a power switch is turned on (powered on) in a
power unit 245, the motherboard 240 and the gaming board 250 are
started up. After the motherboard 240 and the gaming board 250 have
been started up, individual processing operations are made in
parallel. That is, in the gaming board 250, a CPU 251 executes a
processing operation of reading out a preliminary authentication
program that is stored in a boot ROM 252 and a processing operation
of performing preliminary authentication by means of the
authentication program. The word "preliminary authentication" used
here designates a processing operation of checking and
authenticating that tampering of an authentication program is not
performed in advance before being taken in the motherboard 240 in
accordance with the preliminary authentication program (A1).
[0445] On the other hand, in the motherboard 240, a main CPU 241
executes a BIOS that is stored in a ROM 242. As a result,
compression data that is incorporated in the BIOS is decompressed
in a RAM 243 (B1). Then, the main CPU 241 executes the BIOS that is
decompressed in the RAM 243 and then diagnoses and initializes a
variety of peripheral devices (B2).
[0446] After that, the main CPU 241 reads out the authentication
program that is stored in a ROM 255 via a PCI bus and stores the
read out authentication program in the RAM 243 (B3). At this time,
the main CPU 241 takes a check sum by means of an ADD SUM system (a
standard check function), in accordance with a function of a
standard BIOS of the BIOS. In this manner, it is checked whether or
not the authentication program is stored in the RAM 243 smoothly
without any problem.
[0447] Next, the main CPU 241 checks a member that is connected to
an IDE bus. After that, the main CPU 241 provides an access via an
IDE bus to a memory card 253 that is inserted into a card slot 253S
and then reads out game programs and game system programs from the
memory card 253. In this case, data configuring the game programs
and the game system programs is read out by four bytes.
Subsequently, the main CPU 241 performs authentication to check and
certify that tampering of the read out game programs and game
system programs is not performed, in accordance with the
authentication program that is stored in the RAM 243 (B4).
[0448] After authentication processing completes normally, the main
CPU 241 writes and stores the game programs and game system
programs that are targeted for authentication (that have been
authenticated) in the RAM 243 (B5).
[0449] Next, the main CPU 241 provides an access to a GAL 254 that
is mounted on an IC socket 254S, reads payout rate setting data
from the GAL 254, and then writes and stores the read data in the
RAM 243 (B6). After that, the main CPU 241 performs a processing
operation of reading out country identification information that is
stored in the ROM 255 of the gaming board 250 and storing the read
out country identification information in the RAM 243 (B7).
[0450] As a result of the fact that the above authentication
processing has been executed, the main CPU 241 determines whether
or not programs and data are normal (B8). If they are not normal
(B8, NO), an abnormal signal including ID information for
specifying a slot machine 10 is output to an intensive monitoring
device, although not shown. The intensive monitoring device
specifies an abnormal slot machine 10 based on the abnormal signal,
instructs a staff waiting in the vicinity of the slot machine 10 to
take troubleshooting processing, and stores abnormality history
information such as a date and time when such an abnormality has
occurred or a location where such an abnormality has occurred
(B18). After that, a speaker 23 of the slot machine 10 generates a
sound and then a light emitting portion 20 emits light, whereby an
abnormal state is broadcasted. After that, this routine in the
motherboard 240 is completed.
[0451] On the other hand, in a case where the programs and data are
normal (B8, YES), operations of sensors or the like included in a
slot machine 10 are checked in sequential order (B9). Then, it is
determines whether or not all of the sensors or the like operate
normally (B10). In a case where at least one of the sensors or the
like fails (B10, NO), the steps B18 and B19 described above are
executed and then this routine is completed.
[0452] On the other hand, in a case where all of the sensors or the
like are normal (B10, YES), operations of all of driving mechanisms
are then sequentially checked (B11). Then, it is determined whether
or not all of the driving mechanisms operate normally (B12). In a
case where at least one of the driving mechanisms fails (B12, NO),
the steps B18 and B19 described above are executed and then this
routine is completed. On the other hand, in a case where all of the
drive mechanism are normal (B12, YES), operations of all of
electrical accessories are then sequentially checked (B13). Then,
it is determined whether or not all of the electrical accessories
operate normally (B14). In a case where at least one of the
electrical accessories fails (B14, NO), the steps B18 and B19
described above are executed and then this routine is
completed.
[0453] On the other hand, in a case where all of the electrical
accessories are normal (B14, YES), a startup signal indicating that
they have started up normally is output to an intensive monitor
device or the like, although not shown (B15). After that, basic
game processing is executed (B16) and then this routine is
completed. A detailed description of the basic game processing will
be given hereinafter.
[0454] (Basic Game Processing)
[0455] FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 are flowcharts showing a flow of
processing operation in a basic game of a slot machine 10, which is
executed by means of the main CPU 241 of the slot machine 10. One
routine of FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 corresponds to a unit game. It is
assumed that the slot machine 10 is started up in advance, and on
the other hand, variables employed in the main CPU 241 on the side
of the game controller 1 are initialized at predetermined values,
whereby the slot machine 10 operates normally.
[0456] First, it is determined whether or not a credit remains as a
remaining number of coins that a player has inserted (S1).
Specifically, the number of credits C that is stored in the RAM 243
is read out and then a processing operation based on the read out
number of credits C is made. In a case where the number of credits
C is "0" (S1, NO), a game cannot be started, and therefore, this
routine is completed without making any processing operation. On
the other hand, in a case where the number of credits C is "1" or
more (S1, YES), it is determined that a credit remains and then the
routine is caused to revert to S2.
[0457] In step S2, it is determined whether or not a press
operation of an operating button 11 (a BET button) has been made
(S2). In a case where the operating button 11 (the BET button) is
not operated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (S2,
NO), a game condition is set (S3). Specifically, based on the
operation of the operating button 11 (the BET button), the number
of coins to be betted for a pay line in this game is determined. At
this time, an operating signal that is issued by the fact that
operation of the operating button 11 (the BET button) has been made
is received, and based on the number of times of receiving the
received operating signal, the number of BETs relating to a pay
line is stored in a predetermine memory space of the RAM 243. Then,
the number of credits C that is written in a predetermined memory
space of the RAM 243 is read out. A total number of BETs to which
the above number of BETs has been added is subtracted from the read
out number of credits C. The subtracted value is stored in a
predetermined memory space of the RAM 243.
[0458] After that, it is determined whether or not an operating
button 11 (a start button) has been operated (S4). In a case where
the operating button 11 (the start button) is not operated (S4,
NO), S4 is repeatedly executed, whereby a standby state is
established until the operating button 11 has been operated. In a
case where the operating button 11 (the start button) has been
operated (S4, YES), it is determined whether or not a common game
is started (S5).
[0459] On the other hand, in a case where the operating button 11
(the BET button) has been pressed in step S2 (S2, YES), it is
determined whether or not a value indicating the number of credits
C is equal to or greater than a total number of BETs in a previous
game. In other words, it is determined whether or not a game can be
started by a press operation of the operating button 11 (the BET
button). Specifically, when the operating button 11 (the BET
button) is pressed, the number of credits C that is written in the
predetermined memory space of the RAM 243 and the number of BETs
relating to a pay line in a previous game are read out. Based on a
relationship between the read out number of credits C and the
number of BETs, a processing operation is made in accordance with
whether or not the number of credits C is equal to or greater than
a value indicating a total number of BETs in a previous game. In a
case where the value indicating the number of credits C is less
than the total number of BETs in the previous game (S16, NO), a
game cannot be started, and therefore, this routine is completed
without making any processing operation.
[0460] On the other hand, in a case where it is determined that the
value indicating the number of credits C is equal to or greater
than the total number of BETs in the previous game (S16, YES), the
value indicating the total number of BETs in the previous game is
subtracted from the value indicating the number of credits C. Then,
the subtracted value is stored in the predetermined memory space of
the RAM 243. After that, it is determined whether or not a common
game is started (S5).
[0461] In a case where it is determined that the common game is
started (S6, YES), a common game start flag is set to "ON" (S7).
Specifically, data indicating that the game start flag has been set
to "ON" is written in a memory space for the common game start flag
of the RAM 243. On the other hand, in a case where it is determined
that the common game is not started (S6, NO), combination
determination processing is executed (S8).
[0462] In the combination determination processing, a combination
of stopped symbols along a pay line is first determined.
Specifically, a command adapted to generate random numbers for a
random number generator is issued. Then, a predetermined range of
random numbers that is generated by means of the random number
generator is extracted. The extracted random numbers are stored in
a predetermined memory space of the RAM 243. While, in the
embodiment, random numbers are generated in the random number
generator that is provided outside of the main CPU 241, they may be
generated in accordance with computation processing of the main CPU
241 without providing this random number generator.
[0463] After that, a random number table and a winning combination
table for awarding a prize, each of which is stored in the ROM 242,
are read out. The read out random number table and winning
combination table are stored in a predetermined memory space of the
RAM 243. Based on the random number table described above,
stop-display is controlled for each reel.
[0464] Next, the random number table and winning combination table,
each of which is started in the predetermined memory space of the
RAM 243, are read out. While the random numeric values that are
written in the predetermined memory space of the RAM 243 are
defined as parameters, the random number table are to be referred
to. Then, a combination of stopped symbols relating to a pay line
is determined.
[0465] When a winning combination is determined, the winning
combination table is stored in the predetermined memory space of
the RAM 243. The random numeric values that are written in the
predetermined memory space of the RAM 243 and the winning
combination table are read out. Then, based on the random numeric
values and winning combination table, a stopped symbol combination
to be displayed in a stopped state is determined. At this time, a
symbol arrangement table that is stored in the ROM 242 is read out
by means of the main CPU 241 and then is stored and referred to in
a predetermined memory space of the RAM 243. The determined stopped
symbol data described above is stored in a predetermined memory
space of the RAM 243. As a substitute, stopped symbols may be
determined for each reel with the use of the random number table
described above.
[0466] When a combination of stopped symbols relating to the pay
line described above is determined, it is determined whether or not
the combination of stopped symbols relating to the pay line is a
winning combination. In a case where the combination of stopped
symbols relating to the pay line is a winning combination, a flag
indicating that a prize indicating a kind of the winning
combination is to be awarded is activated in order to generate a
prize that corresponds to a symbol combination that is the
determined winning combination on the pay line. The flag indicating
that the activated prize is to be awarded is stored in a
predetermined memory space of the RAM 243. On the other hand, in a
case where the combination of stopped symbols relating to the pay
line is another combination, i.e., a losing combination, the flag
indicating that the prize is to be awarded is not activated.
[0467] In the combination determination processing of step S8
described above, a combination may be determined as is the case
with a unit game employing scatter symbols. In a case where scatter
symbols are employed, it is determined whether or not a winning
prize is established according to the number of scatter symbols
having been rearranged. The number of scatter symbols having been
rearranged can be counted according to symbols configuring the
combination that is determined in accordance with the determination
processing of step S8. For example, with the use of a code number
indicating the determined combination, the number of scatter
symbols can be counted referring to a data table shown in FIG.
42.
[0468] After the above combination determination processing has
been executed, a subroutine of expectation value meter lighting
control processing of FIG. 93 to be described later is invoked and
executed (S18). Next, reels 30A, 30B, 30C, 30D, and 30E are rotated
so as to move a plurality of symbols 301 in a plurality of display
windows 7A to 7E (S9). In the step S9, a subroutine of FIG. 66 to
be described later is invoked and executed. The processing
operation of starting reel rotation shown in FIG. 66 is executed,
whereby a normal rotation mode or a variety of special rotation
modes are selected and then reel rotation control is performed.
After that, the routine is waited until a predetermined period of
time has elapsed (S10). Then, rotation of the reels 30A, 30B, 30C,
30D, and 30E is automatically stopped (S11). In the step S11, a
subroutine of FIG. 67 to be described later is invoked and
executed. The processing operation of stopping reels shown in FIG.
66 is executed, whereby reel stop control is performed in a normal
stop mode or in a special stop mode. In accordance with the
processing operation of the step S11, the reels 30A, 30B, 30C, 30D,
and 30E are automatically controlled to be stopped so as to form a
combination that is determined in accordance with the combination
determination processing of step S8. That is, in accordance with
the processing operation of the step S11, symbols are rearranged so
as to form a combination that is determined in accordance with the
combination determination processing of step S8.
[0469] Next, in the combination determination processing in step
S8, it is determined whether or not a winning combination is
established (S12). Specifically, this determination is made based
on a state of a flag indicating that a prize relating to a pay line
stored in a predetermined memory space of the RAM 243 is to be
awarded. In a case where the flag indicating that the prize is to
be awarded is not activated (S12, NO), it is determined that no
winning combination is established and then this routine is
completed.
[0470] On the other hand, in a case where the flag indicating that
the prize is to be awarded is activated (S12, YES), it is
determined whether or not a winning combination established in
accordance with the combination determination processing in S8 is
"BLUE 7". Specifically, in a case where the winning combination is
"BLUE 7" (S13, YES), coins whose number according to the winning
combination are paid out (S17) and then this routine is
completed.
[0471] On the other hand, in a case where the winning combination
is not "BLUE 7" (S13, NO), it is determined whether or not a common
game completion flag is set to ON (S14). Specifically, it is
determined whether or not data indicating that the common game
completion flag is set to ON is written in a common game completion
flag region of the RAM 243. In a case where the common game
completion is not set to ON (S14, NO), S14 is repeatedly executed,
whereby a standby state is established. In addition, in a case
where the common game completion flag is set to ON (S14, YES), free
game processing is executed (S15). Then, this routine is
completed.
[0472] <<Bonus Game Processing>>
[0473] FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing bonus game processing to be
invoked and executed in step S15 of FIG. 48. A bonus game is
started after the routine has migrated from a basic game to the
bonus game on a condition that five or more bonus symbols have been
rearranged in the basic game. This bonus game is a game to be
played by determining a magnification of bonus symbols in
accordance with roulette lottery processing and then determining a
prize to be awarded to a player in accordance with the prize when a
free game has been played and the determined magnification.
[0474] First, the CPU 71 determines the number of times of roulette
lottery, based on the number of bonus symbols that have been
rearranged in a basic game (step S4911). For example, when five
bonus symbols have been rearranged in a basic game, the number of
times of roulette lottery is determined to be once; when six bonus
symbols have been rearranged, the number is determined to twice;
when seven bonus symbols have been rearranged, the number is
determined to be three times; when eight bonus symbols have been
rearranged, the number is determined to be five times; when nine
bonus symbols have been rearranged, the number is determined to be
seven times; and when ten bonus symbols have been rearranged, the
number is determined to be ten times. In this way, the more bonus
symbols have been rearranged in a basic game, the more times of
roulette lottery are.
[0475] Next, the CPU 71 performs roulette lottery processing (step
S4913). A magnification is determined in accordance with this
roulette lottery processing. For example, when a plurality of
magnifications are 15, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, and 1000,
one of these magnifications is determined in accordance with the
roulette lottery processing.
[0476] In addition, in the processing of the step S4913, the upper
image display panel 131 displays an image simulating a roulette
board on which images indicating a plurality of magnifications are
arranged in a circumferential shape. When roulette lottery starts,
the images indicating the plurality of magnifications are selected
on a one by one image basis and then the selected images are
displayed in an illumination mod and are displayed in a
non-illumination mode. The illumination display and the
non-illumination display are sequentially made as to the images
indicating the plurality of magnifications, thereby making a
display in such a manner that a magnification is determined by
means of a roulette as if the illumination display and the
non-display display were rotating.
[0477] Duplicated same magnifications may be included in the images
indicating the plurality of magnifications. For example, it may be
that three low magnifications 15 or 20 are included, two 25 or 30
magnifications are included, and only one magnification that is
greater than these magnifications is included. By doing this, a
lower magnification can be defined to be easily won, and a higher
magnification can be defined to be hardly won.
[0478] In addition, when roulette lottery processing is performed a
plurality of times, a roulette is disabled to stop at an image
indicating a magnification have been won once. By doing this, a
player can be given a sense of expectation that a higher
magnification will be won. In a case where a plurality of same
magnifications are included in duplicate, a roulette is enabled to
stop at a different image with a same magnification. For example,
in the example described above, three low magnifications 15 (a
first magnification 15, a second magnification 15, and a third
magnification 15) are included. After the first magnification 15
has won in a first time of winning prize determination processing,
winning prize determination processing is executed excluding this
first magnification 15. That is, in a case where the first
magnification 15 has won in the first time of winning prize
determination processing, the second magnification 15 and the third
magnification 15 are targeted for winning prize determination
processing as to the magnifications 15. Therefore, even in a case
where the magnification 15 (the first magnification 15) has won in
the first time of the winning prize determination processing, 15
there may occur a case of winning in the second time of the winning
prize determination processing (winning of the second magnification
15 and the third magnification 15).
[0479] Next, the CPU 71 stores a magnification that is determined
in accordance with the roulette lottery processing of step S4913
(step S4915). In addition, the processing of step S4915, an image
of the magnification that is determined in accordance with the
roulette lottery processing is finally displayed to be illuminated.
By doing this, a player can visually recognize the magnification
that is determined in accordance with the roulette lottery
processing.
[0480] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not to complete
roulette lottery processing (step S4917). As described above, the
number of times of roulette lottery is determined in accordance
with the processing operation of step S4911, and roulette lottery
processing can be performed by the determined number. The
determination of step S4917 is a processing operation of
determining whether or not roulette lottery processing has been
performed by the determined number in the processing operation of
step S4911.
[0481] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that roulette lottery
processing is not completed in the determination processing of step
S4917 (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to reverts to the step
S4913 described above.
[0482] When roulette lottery processing has been performed a
plurality of times, the magnification that is determined in each
lottery processing operation is added and then the added
magnification is stored in the processing operation of step S4915.
For example, when the number of times of roulette lottery has been
determined to be two times in accordance with the processing
operation of step S4911, the roulette lottery processing of step
S4913 is repeated two times. After a magnification has been set to
50 in a first time of roulette lottery processing, when a
magnification has been set to 50 in a second time of roulette
lottery processing as well, the added 100 (=50+50) is set as a
magnification that is determined in the roulette lottery processing
and then the setting is stored in the processing operations of step
S4915.
[0483] When the CPU 71 determines that roulette lottery processing
has been competed in the determination processing of step S4917
(YES), a counter indicating the number of free games is initialized
(step S4919). For example, the counter indicating the number of
free games is set to 7. By doing this, seven free games can be
performed.
[0484] Next, the CPU 71 performs a free game using five reels M3a
to M3e (step S4921). Then, the CPU 71 determines a prize to be
awarded to a player, based on a result of the free game (step
S4923). Specifically, when bonus symbols have been displayed in a
stopped state by rearranging them after the free game has been
performed, a numeric value obtained by multiplying the probability
described above for the number of bonus symbols that are displayed
in a stopped state is awarded to a player as a prize.
[0485] For example, after a free game has been performed once, when
four bonus symbols have been displayed in a stopped state, a
magnification is determined to be 100 (=50+50) in the example
described above; and therefore, in the free game at that time,
4.times.100=400 is awarded to a player as a prize.
[0486] Next, the CPU 71 updates a counter indicating the number of
free games (step S4925). For example, the counter indicating the
number of free games is subtracted by 1.
[0487] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not to complete the
free game (step S4927). For example, the CPU 71 determines whether
or not a value of the counter indicating the number of free games
is set to zero.
[0488] When the CPU 71 determines that the free game is not
completed (NO), the CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform
retrigger from a result of the free game that has been performed in
step S4921 (step S4929). Retrigger is to change a magnification by
performing roulette lottery processing again. For example, a
condition for performing retrigger is that five or more bonus
symbols have been displayed in a stopped state in a free game. That
is, the determination processing of step S4929 is a processing
operation of determining whether or not five or more bonus signals
have been displayed in a stopped state in a free game.
[0489] When it is determined that retrigger is performed in the
determination processing of step S4929 (YES), roulette lottery
processing is performed (step S4931), a magnification is changed
(step S4933), and then the counter indicating the number of free
games is updated (step S4935).
[0490] The roulette lottery processing of step S4931 is a
processing operation similar to that of the step S4913 described
above. Further, like the steps S4911 to S4917 described above, the
number of times that roulette lottery can be performed may be
determined according to the number of bonus symbols that have been
displayed in a stopped state in a free game.
[0491] A processing operation of changing a magnification in step
S4933 is a processing operation of adding a current magnification
to the magnification that determined in the processing operation of
the step S4915 described above. For example, when a magnification
100 has newly won in the processing operation of step S4931, the
magnification has been already set to 100 (50+50) in the example
described above; and therefore, 100+100=200 is updated as a new
magnification in accordance with the processing operation of step
S4933. In a free game to be performed after that, this new
magnification is multiplied and then a prize is determined.
[0492] A processing operation of updating the counter indicating
the number of free games in step S4935 is a processing operation of
increasing the number of free games to a predetermined number of
times, for example, five times.
[0493] When the CPU 71 determines that no retrigger is performed in
the determination processing of the step S4929 described above (NO)
or when the CPU 71 executes the processing operation of step S4935,
the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step S4921.
[0494] In addition, when it is determined that a free game is
completed in the determination processing of the step S4927
described above (YES), this subroutine is completed.
[0495] (Common Game Processing)
[0496] Next, common game processing will be described with
reference to FIG. 50.
[0497] First, a common game screen that is a rendering screen at
the time of stopping a common game is displayed in an upper liquid
crystal display panel 5A (S201). Then, it is determined whether or
not a common game start flat is set to ON. Specifically, it is
determined whether or not data indicating that the common game
start flag is set to ON is written in a region of the game start
flag of a RAM 243 (S202).
[0498] In a case where the common game start flag is not set to ON
(S202, NO), this routine is completed. On the other hand, in a case
where the common game start flag is set to ON (S202, YES), a
rendering screen at the time of common game execution is displayed
in the upper liquid crystal panel 5A (S204).
[0499] Next, a common game is started (S205). Then, it is
determined whether or not a player has won the common game (S206).
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the common game is
caused to be successful with the use of random numeric values
obtained by extracting random numbers.
[0500] After that, it is determined whether or not the player has
won the common game (S207). In the case where the player has won
the game (S207, YES), a cumulative number of points is counted up
by 1 point (S208) and then the cumulative number of points is
displayed (S209). Then, it is determined whether or not the common
game has been executed a predetermined number of times (S210). On
the other hand, in a case where the player has not won the game
(S207, NO), it is determined whether or not the common game has
been executed a predetermined number of times without counting up
the cumulative number of points (S210).
[0501] In a case where the common game has not been executed a
predetermined number of times (S210, NO), the game is executed
again from S203 and then a next common game is started. For
example, in a case where a common game has been repeatedly
performed 10 times, for example, (S210, YES), a current screen is
switched to a basic game screen (S211). After that, the number of
free games is determined (S212) and then the cumulative number of
points is reset (S213). Then, the common game completion flag is
set to ON (S214) and then this routine is completed.
[0502] (First Reel Setting Processing)
[0503] First reel setting processing will be described with
reference to FIG. 51. First, it is determined whether or not a reel
setting command has been executed (S501). If no reel setting
command is executed (S501, NO), this processing operation is
completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1, if a reel setting
device 635 is connected to a slot machine 10 to enable data
communication therewith, it is determined that the reel setting
command has been executed by sensing this connection (S501, YES).
It may be determined that the reel setting command has been
executed by a reel setting command signal being transmitted to a
main PCB 110 of the slot machine 10 by means of key operation in
the reel setting device 635. After that, the slot machine 10
instructs the reel setting device 635 to display a setting screen.
In this manner, the reel setting device 635 displays a procedure
for reel setting or a manual on a screen (S502).
[0504] Next, an operator makes key operation from the reel setting
device 635, whereby it is determined whether or not a data signal
of a reel number has been received from the reel setting device 635
(S503). In a case where no data signal has been received (S503,
NO), a standby state is established by executing S503 again. On the
other hand, in a case where the data signal of the reel number has
been received (S503, YES), any one the first to fifth reel units
M11a to M11e that corresponds to the reel number is targeted to be
set and then the following processing operation is executed.
[0505] First, an operator having specified a reel number manually
operates a reel M3 of each of the first to fifth reel units M11a to
M11e that corresponds to the specified reel number. Then, a
magnetic force signal pattern for at least one rotation is acquired
and then the acquired pattern is stored in a magnetic force
detection value table of FIG. 45 (S504). After that, it is
determined whether or not an operation command signal has been
input (S504), or in a case where the signal is not input (S504,
NO), a standby state is established.
[0506] The operation command signal is input to a slot machine 10
by the reel setting device 635 being made by key operation when a
specific site has moved a predetermined position (a rotation angle
of a predetermined reel M3) in a case where the specific site such
as a specific symbol 501 is defined as a reel origin position. When
an operation command signal is input (S504, YES), a magnetic force
detection signal is read with an input timing of this operation
command signal and then a magnetic force detection value of this
magnetic force detection signal is acquired as a reel origin
magnetic force value (S506).
[0507] After that, a magnetic force signal pattern, a reel origin
magnetic force value, and a symbol are associated with each other
(S507). For example, as shown in FIG. 45, in a case where a site of
a reel M3 on which a "BLUE 7" symbol of code number "08" has been
arranged is set or selected as a reel origin position, if a
magnetic force detection value (a reel origin magnetic force value)
obtained when an external command signal has been input is "ND78",
a magnetic force signal pattern is stored in a magnetic force
detection value field so that the "ND78" is stored in a magnetic
force detection value field that corresponds to code number "08" of
a reel setting table.
[0508] As described above, a slot machine 10 of the embodiment, as
shown in FIG. 1, has: a reel M3 having symbols 501 arranged on an
outer circumferential face; a reel drive mechanism M5 configured to
rearrange the symbols 501 by rotationally driving the reel M3; a
magnet M201 that is provided in the reel drive mechanism M5 so as
to change an external magnetic field by means of rotation of the
reel M3; a magnetic force detecting mechanism M202 configured to
output a magnetic force detection signal by detecting a magnetic
force in the external magnetic field; a reel setting means for
associating a magnetic force detection signal and an arrangement
position of the symbols 501 with each other (a reel setting portion
632 of FIG. 2); and a reel drive control means (a main PCB 110 of
FIG. 38 and FIG. 39) for controlling the reel drive mechanism M5 so
as to rearrange the symbols 501 in a predetermined arrangement
state based on the magnetic force detection signal and the
arrangement position of the symbols 501.
[0509] In this manner, a slot machine 10 is capable of reducing a
work load required for arrangement more remarkably than in a case
where symbols 501 are arranged while being positioned relative to a
predetermined position (an origin position) of a reel M3, in a case
where symbols 501 are arranged on an outer circumferential face of
the reel M3.
Second Embodiment
[0510] The first embodiment described a configuration of achieving
reel control in an analog manner by associating a magnetic force
signal pattern for one cycle, in which a magnetic force changes
with rotation of a reel M3, and a symbol array. Next, a description
will be given with respect to a configuration of achieving reel
control in a digital manner by forming a digital signal, based on
the change of the magnetic force described above.
[0511] (Outline of Gaming Machine)
[0512] A gaming machine of a second embodiment, as shown in FIG.
52, has a slot machine 10 that has been provided paying attention
to the fact that encoder signals includes an origin pulse signal
and a position pulse signal. An encode signal can be formed by
obtaining a plurality of magnetic force detection signals having a
phase difference of 90 degrees, for example, by disposing a
plurality of the magnetic force detecting mechanisms M202 in FIG. 1
in a point-symmetrical manner relative to a rotation center.
[0513] The slot machine 10 has a reel device M1 of mechanism reel
system that is capable of rearranging symbols 501 with the use of
only an encoder signal that is output with rotation of a reel M3 by
associating a origin pulse signal and the arrangement position of
symbols 501 with each other by means of a correction pulse value
based on a position pulse signal.
[0514] In a specific description, the slot machine 10 has: a reel
device M1 including a reel M3 and a reel control portion 631 of
FIG. 53 configured to control the reel device M1. The reel device
M1 has: a reel M3 having symbols 501 on an outer circumferential
face; a reel drive mechanism M5 configured to rearrange the symbols
501 by rotating driving the reel M3; a reel angle detecting
mechanism M2 configured to output a position pulse signal in units
of predetermined angles by means of rotation of the reel M3 and to
output an origin pulse signal every one rotation of the reel M3;
and a reel setting means (a reel setting portion 632 of FIG. 53)
for associating an origin pulse signal and the arrangement position
of the symbols 501 in accordance with a correction pulse value
based on a position pulse signal.
[0515] In addition, the reel control portion 631 of FIG. 53
include, as a reel drive control means, a function of controlling
the reel drive mechanism M5 so as to rearrange symbols 501 in a
predetermined arrangement state, based on a origin pulse signal, a
correction pulse value, a phase difference pulse signal, and the
arrangement position of the symbols 501.
[0516] In this manner, a slot machine 10 is capable of indirectly
detecting the arrangement position of the symbols 501 based on the
origin pulse signal, the correction pulse value, and the phase
difference pulse signal even if the arrangement position of the
symbols 501 is not directly detected by means of a sensor or the
like, by associating the origin pulse signal and the arrangement
position of the symbols 501 with each other in accordance with the
correction pulse signal based on the position pulse signal that is
output in units of predetermined angles. Therefore, even if a
positional relationship between the symbols 501 and the reel M3 is
not preset, the symbols 501 arranged on the reel M3 can be
specified, so that the symbols 501 can be rearranged in a
predetermined arrangement state. As a result, in a case of
performing a work of arranging the symbols 501 on the outer
circumferential face of the reel M3, a work load required for
arrangement can be reduced more remarkably than in a case of
arranging the symbols 501 while positioning them with respect to a
predetermined position (an origin position) of the reel M3.
[0517] (Functional Flow of Gaming Machine 300: Slot Machine)
[0518] A gaming machine 300 configured as described above has: a
slot machine 10 and an external control device 621 (a center
controller 200) that is connected to the slot machine 10 to enable
data communication therewith. The slot machine 10 enables a reel
setting device 635 to be connected thereto via a
transmitting/receiving portion 652. The reel setting device 635 has
a function as an external operating means for outputting an
operation command signal by means of an external operation.
[0519] Further, the slot machine 10 has a reel control portion 631,
a reel setting portion 632, a reel setting storage portion 633, a
reel angle detecting portion 634, and a reel origin detecting
portion 636. The reel origin detecting portion 636 has a function
of outputting a reel origin signal when an origin position of a
reel M3 has been detected. On the other hand, the reel angle
detecting portion 634 has a function of outputting a position pulse
signal, an origin pulse signal, and a phase difference pulse
signal.
[0520] Specifically, the reel angle detecting portion 634 is an
encoder device configured to output a position pulse signal, an
origin pulse signal, and a phase difference pulse signal by
magnetically detecting rotation of a reel M3. The position pulse
signal is output in units of predetermined angles by means of
rotation of the reel M3. The origin pulse signal is output every
one rotation of the reel M3. The pulse difference pulse signal is
output with a phase difference of 90 degrees, for example, so as to
be able to detect forward and backward directions of the reel
M3.
[0521] The reel setting storage portion 633 stores a variety of
data required for reel setting such as a correction pulse value
based on a position pulse signal. The reel control portion 631 has
a function of controlling a reel device M1 so as to rearrange
symbols 501 in a predetermined arrangement state based on an origin
pulse signal, a correction pulse value, a phase difference pulse
signal, and the arrangement position of symbols 501.
[0522] The reel setting portion 632 has a function of associating
an origin pulse signal and the arrangement position of symbols 501
with each other in accordance with a correction pulse value based
on a position pulse signal. Specifically, the reel setting portion
632 has a function of starting counting of a phase difference pulse
signal with an output timing of an operation command signal and
then defining a count value when counting has been stopped with an
output timing of the origin pulse signal as a correction pulse
value. In this manner, the operation command is output by means of
an external operation; and therefore, symbols 501 can be positioned
at a predetermined position (an origin position) of a reel M3
merely by performing a setting work of operating the reel setting
device 635 with a timing when a predetermined arrangement state has
been established while an operator visually check the arrangement
state of the symbols 501. As a result, the reel setting portion 632
enables a work of setting a positional relationship between the
symbols 501 and the reel M3 to be easily started by means of
operation of the reel setting device 635.
[0523] Further, the reel setting portion 632 has a function of
detecting whether a rotation direction of a reel M3 is either of
the forward and backward directions by means of a phase difference
pulse signal, and when the phase difference pulse signal is
counted, offsetting the phase difference pulse signal at the time
of forward rotation and the phase difference pulse signal at the
time of backward direction. In this manner, the reel setting
portion 632 enables a correction pulse value to be precisely
obtained even if a reel rotation direction is indefinite by
offsetting the phase difference pulse signal at the time of forward
direction and the phase difference pulse signal at the time of
backward rotation.
[0524] Furthermore, a slot machine 10 has a malfunction sensing
portion 637. The malfunction sensing portion 637 has a function of
sensing an malfunction of a reel angle detecting portion 634 based
on a relationship between an origin position and an origin pulse
signal of a reel M3 that have been detected by means of a reel
origin detecting portion 636. In this manner, the malfunction
sensing portion 637 senses an malfunction of the reel angle
detecting portion 634 to thereby able to prevent an occurrence of a
failure that symbols 501 are not rearranged in a predetermined
arrangement state. Other constituent elements are identical to
those of the first embodiment.
[0525] (Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine: Reel Device
M1)
[0526] A reel device M1 is connected to a main PCB 110. As shown in
FIG. 54, each of the first to fifth reel units M11a to M11e has a
reel board M67. The reel board M67 has: an input/output portion 675
that is connected to the main PCB 110 to enable data communication
therewith; a reel drive portion M672 that is connected to the
input/output portion M675; a backlight drive portion M673; and a
rendering device drive portion M674. An origin sensor M671 and an
encoder device M21 are respectively connected to the input/output
portion M675.
[0527] (Reel Setting Table)
[0528] FIG. 55 shows an example of a data table that is employed in
a case of computing a correction symbol center value. This data
table has: an item field adapted to store an item required to
compute the correction symbol center value; a computation formula
field adapted to store a computation formula of an item required
for computation; an item value field adapted to a specific value of
each item; and a symbol data field adapted to store a computation
value of each symbol.
[0529] The item field has a "reel number", a "number of symbols N",
a "code number", a "number of periodic pulses EP", a "number of
unit pulses UP", a "symbol boundary value Pn", a "symbol center
value SPn", a "correction pulse value AP", and a "correction symbol
center value ASPn".
[0530] The "reel number" is data for specifying any of the first to
fifth reel units M11a to M11e. For example, in a case where the
"item value" corresponding to the "reel number" is set to "1", it
designates that the first reel unit M11a has been selected. That
is, reel numbers "1" to "5" are assigned to the first to fifth reel
units M11a to M11e, and an operator can arbitrarily specify these
reel numbers.
[0531] The "number of symbols N" is data for specifying the number
of symbols 501 that are arranged on a reel M3. For example, in a
case where the "item value" corresponding to the "number of symbols
N" is "22", 22 items of numeric value data of "00" to "21" are
assigned to the symbol data field corresponding to the "code
number". The "number of periodic pulses EP" is the number of pulses
to be output in a case where the reel M3 has made one rotation, and
"200" is input, for example. In this case, the resonance of an
encoder device M21 is indicated to be 200.
[0532] The "number of unit pulses UP" stores a computation value of
the number of periodic pulses EP/the number of symbols N. That is,
"18" is stored. In this case, a width of one symbol 501 is
indicated to be 18 pulses. The "symbol boundary value Pn" indicates
a boundary value of each of symbols 501 to which code symbols "00"
to "21" have been set. In the case where n=N-1, i.e., in the
symbols 501 of the code numbers "00" to "20", the symbol boundary
value Pn is obtained in accordance with a computation formula of
Pn=UPn.times.n. On the other hand, in the case where n=N, i.e., in
the symbols 501 of the code numbers "00" to "20", the symbol
boundary value Pn is obtained in accordance with a computation
formula of Pn=ER In this manner, a boundary value between the "code
numbers" of "00" and "01" is set to "18", and a boundary value
between the "code numbers" of "01" and "02" is set to "36".
[0533] The "symbol center value SPn" indicates an approximate value
of a center point on the boundary of the respective symbols 501.
Specifically, the symbol center value SPn is obtained in accordance
with a computation formula of Sp.apprxeq.Pn-Upn/2. For example, in
a case where the "code number" is "00", "9" is set, and in a case
where the "code number" is "01", "27" is set.
[0534] The "correction pulse value AP" indicates a total value of
position pulse signals from starting counting of positional pulse
signals at an actual origin position of a reel M3 instructed by an
operator to an input of an origin pulse signal. That is, in a case
where the reel M3 has been rotated in a forward direction, AP=AP is
obtained. In a case where the reel M3 has been rotated in a
backward direction, AP=EP-AP is obtained. That is, a correction
pulse value is subtracted from "200" indicating the number of
periodic pulses EP, whereby a value is obtained after converted to
a state in which the reel M3 has been rotated in a forward
direction. For example, in a case where the "correction pulse value
AP" of "70" is set, it indicates that a position pulse signal is
generated by 70 pulses until an origin pulse signal of the encoder
device M21 has been input from an origin position of the reel M3 (a
reel band M32).
[0535] The "correction symbol center value ASPn" is a value
indicating a relationship between an origin pulse signal that is
corrected by a correction pulse value AP and a position pulse
signal of a symbol 501. That is, in accordance with a computation
formula of ASPn=SPn+AP, a relationship between the origin pulse
signal and the center position of the symbol 501 can be detected by
means of the position pulse signal. For example, in a case where
the "code number" is "00", "79" is set, it indicates that a
79.sup.th pulse of the position pulse signal from an output of the
origin pulse signal becomes a center point of the symbol 501 that
is assigned by "00".
[0536] Such data tables are respectively provided as to the first
to fifth reel units M11a to M11e, thereby making it possible to
individually set reel specifications for the number of symbols, for
example, as to the first to fifth reel units M11a to M11e. Other
constituent elements are identical to those of the first
embodiment.
[0537] (Processing Operation of Slot Machine 10)
[0538] In the configuration described above, an operation of a slot
machine 10 will be described. Other processing operations are
identical except that second reel setting processing is executed in
place of first reel setting processing in the first embodiment.
[0539] (Second Reel Setting Processing)
[0540] The second reel setting processing will be described with
reference to FIG. 56. First, it is determined whether or not a reel
setting command has been executed (S301). In a case where the reel
setting command is not executed (S301, NO), this processing
operation is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52, if
a reel setting device 635 is connected to a slot machine 10 to
enable data communication therewith, it is determined that the reel
setting command has been executed by sensing this connection (S301,
YES). It may be determined that the reel setting command has been
executed by a reel setting command signal being transmitted to a
main PCB 110 of the slot machine 10 by means of key operation in
the reel setting device 635. After that, the slot machine 10
instructs the reel setting device 635 to display a setting screen.
In this way, the reel setting device 635 displays a reel setting
procedure or a manual on a screen (S302).
[0541] Next, an operator makes key operation from the reel setting
device 635, whereby it is determined that a data signal of a reel
number has been received from the reel setting device 635 (S303).
In a case where no data signal has been received (S303, NO), a
standby state is established by executing S303 again. On the other
hand, in a case where the data signal of the reel number has been
received (S303, YES), each of the first to fifth reel units M11a to
M11e that correspond to the reel number is targeted to be set and
then the following processing operation is executed.
[0542] First, it is determined whether or not an operation command
signal has been received (S304). In a case where no operation
command signal has been received (S304, NO), a standby state is
established by executing S304 again. In this standby state, an
operator having specified a reel number manually rotates a reel M3
of each of the first to fifth reel units M11a to M11e that
corresponds to the specified reel number. Then, when a
predetermined site of a specific symbol 501 or the like on the reel
M3 coincides with a reel origin position, an operation command
signal is output to a slot machine 10 by means of key operation of
the reel setting device 635. When this operation command signal is
input (S304, YES), the input operation command signal is handled as
being a reel origin signal. Then, a correction pulse signal is
reset to "0" (S305).
[0543] After that, input of encoder signals made of a position
pulse signal or a phase difference pulse signal and an origin pulse
signal from a reel angle detecting mechanism M2 is accepted (S306).
An operator rotates a reel M3 in a forward direction or in a
backward direction, whereby it is determined whether or not the
position pulse signal has been input (S307). In a case where no
position pulse signal has been input (S307, NO), it is subsequently
determined whether or not the origin pulse signal has been input
(S311). In a case where no origin pulse signal has been input
(S311, NO), S307 is executed again and then acceptance of input of
the position pulse signal is continued.
[0544] On the other hand, in a case where the position pulse signal
has been input (S307, YES), it is subsequently determined whether
or not a rotation direction of a reel M3 is a forward rotation
based on the phase difference pulse signal (S308). In a case where
the rotation direction is a forward rotation (S308, YES), a
correction pulse value is counted up by "1" (S309) and then it is
determined whether or not the origin pulse signal has been input
(S311). On the other hand, in a case where the rotation direction
is not a forward direction (S308, NO), the correction pulse value
is counted down by "1" (S310) and then it is determined that the
origin pulse signal has been input (S311). In this manner, even in
a case where the rotation direction of the reel M3 is in a state in
which forward and backward directions coexist or in a case where a
fluctuation occurs when the reel M3 is manually rotated, the
correction pulse value can be precisely obtained.
[0545] Next, when the origin pulse signal is input (S311, YES), the
counted up or counted down correction pulse value is stored in a
reel setting table of FIG. 55 together with a reel number (S312).
After that, the correction symbol center value is obtained with the
use of the reel setting table (S313).
[0546] As described above, the slot machine 10 of the second
embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, has: a reel M3 having symbols 501
arranged on an outer circumferential face; a reel drive mechanism
M5 configured to rearrange the symbols 501 by rotationally driving
the reel M3; a reel angle detecting mechanism M2 configured to
output a position pulse signal in units of predetermined angles by
means of rotation of the reel M3 and to output an origin pulse
signal every one rotation of the reel M3; a reel setting means (a
reel setting portion 632 of FIG. 53 or first reel setting
processing of FIG. 51) configured to associate the origin pulse
signal and an arrangement position of the symbols 501 with each
other in accordance with a correction pulse value based on the
position pulse signal; and a reel drive control means (a main
PCB110 of FIG. 54) configured to control the reel drive mechanism
M5 so as to rearrange the symbols 501 in a predetermined
arrangement state based on the origin pulse signal, the correction
pulse value, a phase difference pulse value, and the arrangement
position of the symbols 501.
[0547] In this manner, the slot machine 10 is capable of reducing a
work load required for arrangement more remarkably than in a case
of arranging symbols 501 while positioning them relative to a
predetermined position (an origin position) of the reel M3, in a
case of performing a work of arranging the symbols 501 on the outer
circumferential face of the reel M3.
[0548] (Malfunction Sensing)
[0549] Further, the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment is
capable of sensing a malfunction of a reel angle detecting
mechanism M2. Hereinafter, a detailed description thereof will be
described with reference to FIG. 57 to FIG. 59.
[0550] Check pulse value acquisition processing of FIG. 58 and
third reel setting processing of FIG. 59 are executed. In the check
pulse value acquisition processing of FIG. 58, it is determined
whether or not a reel setting command has been executed (S401). In
a case where the reel setting command has not been executed (S401,
NO), this processing operation is completed. On the other hand, as
shown in FIG. 53, if the reel setting device 635 is connected to
the slot machine 10 to enable data communication therewith, it is
determined that the reel setting command has been executed by
sensing this connection (S401, YES).
[0551] Next, an operator makes key operation from the reel setting
device 635, whereby it is determined whether a data signal of a
reel number has been received from the reel setting device 635
(S402). In a case where no data signal has been received (S402,
NO), a standby state is established by executing S402 again. On the
other hand, in a case where the data signal of the reel number has
been received (S402, YES), each of the first to fifth reel units
M11a to M11e that correspond to the reel number is targeted to be
set and then the following processing operation is executed.
[0552] First, an input of an encoder signal has been accepted
(S403). Then, it is determined whether or not a reel origin signal
has been input from an origin sensor M671 of FIG. 21 (S404). In a
case where no reel origin signal has been input (S404, NO), a
standby state is established by executing S404 again. On the other
hand, if an origin sensor M671 of FIG. 21 detects a cutout portion
M921 of FIG. 25, whereby it is determined that a reel origin signal
has been input (S404, YES), a check pulse value is reset to "0"
(S405). After that, an acquisition completion flag of the check
pulse value is set to OFF (S406).
[0553] Next, it is determined whether or not a position pulse
signal has been input (S407). In a case where no position pulse
signal has been input (S407, NO), it is subsequently determined
whether or not an origin pulse signal has been input (S411). In a
case where no origin pulse signal has been input (S411, NO), S407
is executed again and then acceptance of an input of the positional
pulse signal is continued. In a case where the position pulse
signal has been input (S407, YES), it is subsequently determined
whether or not a rotation direction of a reel M3 is a forward
rotation based on a phase difference pulse signal (S408). In a case
where the rotation direction is a forward rotation (S408, YES), the
check pulse value is counted up by "1" (S409) and then it is
determined whether or not the origin pulse signal has been input
(S410). On the other hand, in a case where the rotation direction
is not a forward rotation (S408, NO), the check pulse value is
counted down by "1" (S410) and then it is determined whether or not
the origin pulse signal has been input (S411). If the origin pulse
signal has been input (S411, YES), a correction pulse value having
been counted up or counted down is stored together with the reel
number (S412).
[0554] In addition, in the third reel setting processing of FIG.
59, after an origin pulse signal has been input (S311, YES), a
standby state is established until a check pulse value is acquired
by checking an acquisition completion flag (S314). In this manner,
the check pulse value can be acquired during a work of acquiring a
correction pulse value. Other steps are identical to those of the
first reel setting processing in FIG. 51.
[0555] After the check pulse value has been acquired as described
above, it is determined whether or not a relationship between an
origin position of a reel M3 and an origin pulse signal (a total
value of position pulse signals) coincides with the acquired check
pulse value during operation of the slot machine 10. If the
relationship coincides with the value, it is determined to be
normal, and if not, it is determined to be abnormal, whereby a
malfunction of the reel angle detecting mechanism M2 is sensed.
[0556] As described above, the slot machine 10 of the second
embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, includes: a reel M3 having symbols
501 on an outer circumferential face; a reel drive mechanism M5
configured to rearrange the symbols 501 by rotationally driving the
reel M3; a reel angle detecting mechanism M2 configured to output a
position pulse signal in units of predetermined angles by means of
rotation of the reel M3 and to output an origin pulse signal every
one rotation of the reel M3; a reel setting means (a reel setting
portion 632 of FIG. 53 or third setting processing of FIG. 59)
configured to associate the origin pulse signal and an arrangement
position of the symbols 501 with each other in accordance with a
correction pulse value based on the position pulse signal; a reel
drive control means (a main PCB 110 of FIG. 54) configured to
control the reel drive mechanism M5 so as to rearrange the symbols
501 in a predetermined arrangement state based on the origin pulse
signal, the correction pulse value, a phase difference pulse
signal, and the arrangement position of the symbols 501; a reel
origin detecting mechanism (an origin sensor 671 of FIG. 21 or a
cutout portion M921 of FIG. 25) configured to detect an origin
position of the reel M3; and a malfunction sensing means (such as
the main PCB 110) for sensing a malfunction of the reel angle
detecting mechanism based on a relationship between the origin
position of the reel M3 and the origin pulse signal. In this
manner, the slot machine 10 is capable of preventing an occurrence
of a failure that the reel drive control means cannot rearrange the
symbols 501 in a predetermined arrangement state, by sensing a
malfunction of the reel angle detecting mechanism M2.
[0557] (Reel Rendering by Backlight Device M7)
[0558] In addition, the slot machine 10 of the first and second
embodiments is configured to be able to individually control a
plurality of illumination light sources M71 in a backlight device
M7.
[0559] Specifically, the slot machine 10 has: a reel M3 including a
reel band M32 that is formed to enable transmission of illumination
light, the reel having symbols 501 arranged on the reel band M32; a
reel drive mechanism M5 configured to rearrange the symbols 501 by
rotationally driving the reel M3; a back light device M7 that is
arranged to emit illumination light in a direction of the reel band
M32 from an inner circumferential side of the reel M3 so that the
illumination light having transmitted the reel band M32 is visually
recognized from the outside; and a backlight control device (a main
PCB 110 of FIG. 54) configured to control an emission mode (such as
light quantity, emission intervals, or emission timing) of the
illumination light that is emitted from the backlight device M7.
The backlight device M7 has a plurality of illumination light
sources M71 that is arranged in a widthwise direction and in a
longitudinal direction of the reel band M32 and that is capable of
changing a light quantity when the illumination light is emitted,
in a plurality of steps. The backlight control device is capable of
individually controlling the plurality of illumination light
sources M71.
[0560] In this manner, the slot machine 10 is capable of
individually controlling the emission mode of illumination light in
each light source, so that a rendering effect and a degree of
freedom in rendering at the time of rotation of the reel M3 or at
the time of rearrangement of the symbols 501 can be enhanced with
the use of the illumination light.
[0561] More specifically, the backlight control device is capable
of individually controlling a plurality of illumination light
sources M71 so as to enter an emission mode of illumination light
together with rotation of the reel M3. In this manner, the slot
machine 10 can enhance the degree of freedom in rendering when the
reel M3 is rotated, by entering the emission mode of the
illumination light together with rotation of the reel M3.
[0562] For example, when the reel M3 is rotated, when a bonus
symbol appears in a display window 150, the plurality of
illumination light sources M71 are individually controlled to be
able to light the illumination light sources M71 corresponding to a
reel on which such a bonus symbol has appeared in the display
window 150. By doing this, a player can clearly visually recognize
a position of the bonus symbol in a state in which the reel M3 is
rotating.
[0563] In addition, the backlight control device controls the
plurality of illumination light sources M71 so as to increase or
decrease a light quantity in stepwise manner from the inside to the
outside in the widthwise direction and in the longitudinal
direction of the reel band M32. In this manner, the slot machine 10
can impart a gradation-like rendering effect to a symbol 501 or a
reel band M32 having transmitted illumination light by means of
stepwise increase or decrease of the light quantity.
[0564] Further, the backlight control device controls an emission
mode of a plurality of illumination light source M71 in accordance
with the rotation direction of the reel M3. In this manner, a
rendering effect relative to the rotation direction of the reel M3
can be imparted.
[0565] Furthermore, the backlight control device controls the
plurality of illumination light sources M71 so as to change the
increase or decrease position of the light quantity in the same
direction or in the opposite direction relative to the rotation
direction of the reel M3. In this manner, the slot machine 10 can
impart a rendering effect relative to the rotation direction of the
reel M3.
[0566] Still furthermore, the backlight control device controls the
plurality of illumination light sources M71 so as to interlock a
change speed of the increase or decrease position of the light
source relative to the rotation speed of the reel M3. In this
manner, the slot machine 10 can impart a rendering effect relative
to the rotation speed of the reel M3.
[0567] Moreover, the backlight control device controls an emission
mode of the plurality of illumination light sources in accordance
with a combination established when the symbols 501 have been
rearranged. In this manner, the slot machine 10 can impart a
rendering effect relative to the combination established when the
symbols 501 have been rearranged.
[0568] A control operation by means of the backlight control device
described above can be easily achieved by storing mode data in an
illumination mode setting table of FIG. 60. That is, the
illumination mode setting table has the respective reel operation
items such as "reel forward rotation", "reel backward rotation",
"reel rotation speed", "reel rotation stop", "bonus hit", "common
game hit", "losing", "li-zhi", "winning common game", and "losing
common game".
[0569] The "li-zhi" used here designates a state immediately before
symbols 501 are rearranged in a unit game, thereby establishing a
winning combination. For example, in a case where a plurality of
symbols 501 are rearranged in sequential order, a state of a period
a last symbol is rearranged is an "intermediately preceding
state".
[0570] In addition, the respective reel operation items described
above are associated with the respective operation items of
"gradation", "blinking", "light quantity", and "movement". The
"gradation" can be set at either one of two types, i.e., "active
(1)" and "inactive (0)". For example, the "reel forward rotation"
is set at "active (1)". The "reel backward rotation" is set at
"inactive (0)". In this manner, when the reel M3 rotates in a
forward direction, the backlight device M7 performs rendering of
symbols 501 in an illumination mode of gradation. On the other
hand, when the reel M3 rotates in a backward direction, the
illumination mode of gradation is not established.
[0571] The "blinking" enables blinking intervals to be set in six
steps of 0 to 5. In a case where the blinking interval is set to
"0", it designates that lighting continues without blinking. In a
case where the blinking interval is set to "1", the blinking
interval is the longest and then the blinking interval becomes
shorter in sequential order of "2" to "5". For example, the "reel
forward rotation" is set to "3". The "reel backward rotation" is
set to "1". In this manner, when the reel M3 rotates in a forward
direction, the backlight device M7 blinks at comparatively short
intervals. On the other hand, when the reel M3 rotates in a
backward direction, blinking occurs at long intervals.
[0572] The "light quantity" enables a light quantity level to be
set in a range of "5" to "16". That is, if the light quantity level
can be adjusted in 16 steps ranging from "1", which is close to
level 0, to a maximum level "16", the level can be adjusted in a
range "5" or more. This processing is adapted to illuminate symbols
501 sufficiently at a light quantity level of "5" or more, and
however, the level may be adjustable at "0" or more. For example,
the "reel forward rotation" is set to "13". The "reel backward
rotation" is set to "10". In this manner, when the reel M3 rotates
in a forward direction, the symbols 501 is illuminated brighter
than when the reel M3 rotates in a backward direction.
[0573] The "movement" can be set in any one of three types of
"active (1)", "inactive (0)", and "moving together (2)". For
example, the "reel forward rotation" is set at "active (1)", the
"reel backward rotation" is set at "inactive (0)", and the "reel
rotation speed" is set at "moving together (2)". In this manner,
when the reel M3 rotates in a forward direction, an illumination
moves in any direction together with a reel rotation speed, and
when the reel M3 rotates in a backward direction, an illumination
is fixed.
[0574] (Reel Rendering by Rendering Light Emitting Device M8)
[0575] In addition, the slot machine 10 of the first and second
embodiments is configured to be able to individually control a
plurality of rendering light sources M81 in a rendering light
emitting device M8.
[0576] Specifically, the slot machine 10 has a reel device M1
including: a reel M3 having symbols 501 arranged on an outer
circumferential face; a reel drive mechanism M5 configured to
rearrange the symbols 501 by rotationally driving the reel M3; and
a rendering light emitting device M8 that is arranged lateral of
the reel M3 and is configured to emit a plurality of rendering
light beams to be visually recognizable from the outside, and has a
reel rendering control device (a main PCB 110 of FIG. 54)
configured to control an emission mode (such as light quantity,
color, emission intervals, or emission timing) of the rendering
light beams that are emitted from the reel device M1. In addition,
the rendering light emitting device M8 has a plurality of rendering
light sources M81 that is arranged in plurality at least along a
longitudinal direction of a reel band M32 and is capable of
changing the light quantity when the rendering light beams are
emitted, in a plurality of steps; and the reel rendering control
device is capable of individually controlling the plurality of
rendering light sources M81 so as to establish an emission mode of
the rendering light beams together with rotation of the reel
M3.
[0577] In this manner, the slot machine 10 is capable of
individually controlling an emission mode of the rendering light
beams in each light source, so that a rendering effect and a degree
of freedom in rendering at the time of rotation of reel M3 or at
the time of rearrangement of the symbols 501 can be enhanced with
the use of rendering light beams.
[0578] In addition, the reel rendering control device controls an
emission mode of the plurality of rendering light sources M81 in
accordance with rotation of the reel M3. In this manner, the slot
machine 10 can impart a rendering effect relative to rotation of
the reel M3.
[0579] Further, the reel rendering control device controls the
plurality of rendering light sources M81 so as to change an
increase or decrease position of the light quantity in the same
direction or in the opposite direction relative to the rotation
direction of the reel M3. In this manner, the slot machine 10 can
impart a rendering effect relative to rotation of the reel M3.
[0580] Furthermore, the reel rendering control device controls the
plurality of rendering light sources M81 so as to interlock a
change speed of the increase or decrease position of the light
quantity relative to a rotation speed of the reel M3. In this
manner, the slot machine 10 can impart a rendering effect relative
to the rotation speed of the reel M3.
[0581] Moreover, the reel rendering control device controls the
plurality of rendering light sources M81 in accordance with a
combination established when the symbols 501 have been arranged. In
this manner, the slot machine 10 can impart a rendering effect
relative to the combination established when the symbols 501 has
been rearranged.
[0582] A control operation by means of the reel rendering control
device described above can be easily achieved by means of a
rendering mode setting table obtained by excluding "gradation" from
an illumination mode setting table of FIG. 60. The respective items
contained in the table are identical to those contained in the
illumination mode setting table of FIG. 60.
[0583] (Luminance Adjustment of Backlight Device M7)
[0584] In addition, the slot machine 10 of the first and second
embodiment is configured to be able to adjust luminance of a
plurality of illumination light sources M71 in a backlight device
M7. The slot machine 10 may be configured to be able to adjust
luminance of a plurality of rendering light sources M81 in a
rendering light emitting device M8, and can be provided in the same
method as luminance adjustment of the backlight device M7.
[0585] Specifically, in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 61, a
touch panel is provided on an upper image display panel 131. The
upper image display panel 131 is capable of displaying a backlight
luminance adjustment screen. The backlight luminance adjustment
screen may be displayable by means of operations of both of a
player and a manager or may be displayable by means of operation of
only a manager. A display caused by the operation of only the
manager includes an operating method from an "AUDIT menu".
[0586] The backlight luminance adjustment screen has a luminance
adjustment button region 1311 and a reel selection button region
1312. The luminance adjustment button region 1311 includes a
plurality of, for example, three luminance adjustment buttons
1311a, 1311b, and 1311c. These luminance adjustment buttons 1311a,
1311b, and 1311c enable luminance to be adjusted in a plurality of,
for example, three steps.
[0587] On the other hand, the reel selection button region 1312 has
five reel selection buttons 1312a to 1312e. These reel selection
buttons 1312a to 1312e are respectively capable of selecting the
first to fifth reel units M11a to M11e.
[0588] Luminance adjustment of the backlight device M7 is achieved
by means of a backlight luminance adjustment processing routine of
FIG. 62. Specifically, while a game is executed or is stopped, the
backlight luminance adjustment processing routine is periodically
executed as one routine. When the backlight luminance adjustment
processing routine is executed, it is first determined whether or
not a backlight luminance adjustment mode is established (S701). In
a case where the backlight luminance adjustment mode is not
established (S701, NO), this routine is completed. On the other
hand, when a backlight luminance adjustment button is pressed on a
mode selection screen of the upper image display panel 131, it is
determined that the backlight luminance adjustment mode is
established (S701, YES). Then, a backlight luminance adjustment
screen is displayed on the upper image display panel 131 in place
of the mode selection screen (S702).
[0589] Next, reel selection processing is executed (S703). For
example, as shown in FIG. 61, when the reel selection buttons 1312a
to 1312e in the reel selection button region 1312 have been
pressed, the pressed reel selection buttons 1312a to 1312e change
in color. Then, the backlight device M7 of the first to fifth reel
units M11a to M11e that correspond to arrangements of the reel
selection buttons 1312a to 1312e are highlighted to have been
selected as a target for luminance adjustment. In addition, when
the reel selection button 1312a to 1312e targeted for luminance
adjustment are further pressed, they are reverted to a state before
color change so as to become out of the target for luminance
adjustment. By repeating such a press operation, one or more of the
reel selection buttons 1312a to 1312e (the first to fifth reel
units M11a to M11e) are determined.
[0590] After that, when any of the luminance adjustment buttons
1311a, 1311b, 1311c in the luminance adjustment button region 1311
is pressed, a backlight device M7 of any of the first to fifth reel
units M11a to M11e that is selected as a target for luminance
adjustment emits illumination light at a luminance corresponding to
any of the luminance adjustment buttons 1311a, 1311b, and 1311c
(S704). In this manner, the luminance of illumination light is
adjusted in all or in sequential order while it is visually checked
as to the backlight device M7 of each of the first to fifth reel
units M11a to M11e.
[0591] Next, it is determined whether or not adjustment has
completed (S705). At this time, determination of the completion of
adjustment is made by determining whether or not a press operation
has been made over a predetermined period of time or more or by
determining whether or not an adjustment completion button has been
pressed, although not shown. In a case where no adjustment has
completed (S705, NO), S703 and subsequent steps are executed again.
On the other hand, in a case where the adjustment has completed
(S705, YES), a backlight luminance adjustment screen is cleared and
then a variety of screens such as a mode selection screen or a
demonstration screen, for example, are displayed (S706). Then this
routine is completed.
[0592] (Pay Line Rendering)
[0593] In addition, the slot machine 10 of the first and second
embodiments, as shown in FIG. 63, is configured to be able to
display a pay line L on the upper image display panel 131. The pay
line on the upper image display panel 131 is displayed when a
current screen has been changed to a pay line display screen.
[0594] The pay line display screen is provided in the same mode as
that of a pay line L in a display window 150 that is disposed on a
front face of a reel device M1. Specifically, pay line generation
columns 1313 and 1314 are disposed transversely symmetrically.
Among them, a pat line generation column 1313 at a left end part
displayed on the left side viewed from a player side has 25 pay
line generating portions 1313a. In addition, a pay line generation
column 1314 at a right end part disposed at the right side has 25
pay line generating portion 1314a. The pay line L is activated by
connecting the pay line generating portions 1313a and 1314a at the
left end part and at the right end part to each other.
[0595] The pay line display screen is displayed when a combination
of the rearranged symbols 501 forms a winning prize. For example,
in a case where a winning prize is established by a combination of
"PLUM" symbols 501, the "PLUM" symbols 501 of the winning
combination is rendered as a wining prize in accordance with
luminance or color and a blinking state that is different from that
at another site by means of illumination light of the backlight
device M7. Then, on the pay line screen, pay line rendering is
performed by linking with winning rendering exerted by the
backlight device M7. The "link" used here designates that the pay
line rendering is associated with the winning rendering exerted by
the backlight device M7.
[0596] Specifically, simulation winning symbols 1315 are displayed
in the same arrangement mode as that of a winning combination. A
pay line L is displayed on these simulation winning symbols 1315.
Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 64, in a case where the
winning rendering exerted by the backlight device M7 is rendering
of repeating an operation of highlighting the respective symbols
501 in sequential order, pay line rendering allowing the simulation
winning symbols 1315 to be highlighted in sequential order with the
same timing as that of the winning rendering is executed.
Third Embodiment
[0597] The first embodiment described above shows a gaming machine
that achieves reel control in an analog manner. In addition, the
second embodiment showed a gaming machine that achieves reel
control in a digital manner. The third embodiment describes a
variety of modes relating to rotation control and stop control of
five reels of a first reel M3a, a second reel M3b, a third reel
M3c, a fourth reel M3d, and a fifth reel M3e of the gaming machine
of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the
third embodiment can be applied to both of the gaming machine that
achieves reel control in an analog manner (the first embodiment and
the gaming machine that achieves reel control in a digital manner
(the second embodiment). Therefore, a mechanical structure or
hardware configuration of a gaming machine in the third embodiment
is identical to that in the first embodiment or the second
embodiment. Program for executing processing operations shown in
flowcharts shown in FIG. 66 to FIG. 80 described later are stored
in advance in a ROM 72 (FIG. 38) of the gaming machine of the first
embodiment or the second embodiment, and values such as variables
required when the programs have been executed are stored in a RAM
73 (FIG. 38).
[0598] In the third embodiment, a reel M3 of a first reel unit M11a
is referred to as a first reel M3a; a reel M3 of a second reel unit
M11b is referred to as a second reel M3b; a reel M3 of a third reel
unit M11c is referred to as a third reel M3c; a reel M3 of a fourth
reel unit M11d is referred to as a fourth reel M3d; and a reel M3
of a fifth reel unit M11e is referred to as a fifth reel M3e. In
addition, in the following description, a reel M3 is merely
referred to as in a case where there is no need to discriminate
these five reels in particular.
[0599] In the third embodiment, symbols are all symbols that are
used in a gaming machine 300, and these symbols are displayed to be
visually recognizable to a player in the five reels of the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel
M3d, and the fifth reel M3e. The symbols include scatter symbols.
The scatter symbols are symbols whose condition for establishing a
winning prize is that these symbols have been rearranged regardless
of a winning line (a pay line). In particular, it is preferable
that the condition for establishing a winning prize be that a
predetermined number of scatter symbols have been rearranged.
[0600] An outline of the gaming machine according to the third
embodiment is: rendering to be configured presuming post-li-zhi;
randomly selecting individual renderings of six kinds to be
described later; providing data so as to frame-feeding and moving
symbols; enabling individual reels to be frame-fed and reversely
rotated respectively independently; and providing a speed
controller for a respective one of the reels.
[0601] In addition, a start button is provided, whereas a stop
button does not exist in principle. This is because there exists a
gaming machine such that a stop button is activated for some of the
reels, although the stop button is not activated for all of the
reels, in only a given game state as well. In addition, in the
gaming machine according to the embodiment, symbol arrangement is
randomly determined and then a prize is determined depending on the
determined symbol arrangement, and the determined symbols are
arranged as rearranged symbols. Therefore, a winning combination or
a losing combination is first determined by means of lottery
processing in a main control board and then according to a timing
of a player operation, the contents of control are different from
those in a gaming machine adapted to determine a reel stop position
so as not to be discrepant from a lottery result. That is, the
gaming machine according to the embodiment is different from the
one in which symbol arrangement is determined according to a timing
of a player operation after an internal flag of a given winning
combination has been established.
[0602] FIG. 65 shows an outline of the gaming machine according to
the third embodiment. The gaming machine according to the third
embodiment is directed to a gaming machine adapted to execute a
unit game in which a prize is determined based on rearranged
symbols, and includes: a display (such as the display window 150
described above, for example) having a display region configured to
display symbols associated with each of a plurality of scroll lines
(such as the five reels Mia to M3e described above, for example);
and a controller (such as the CPU 71 described above, for example)
for controlling a unit game in which the symbols associated with
the scroll line are moved and then rearranged in the display
region, the controller programmed to execute processing operations
of:
[0603] (1-1-1) randomly determining rearranged symbols (such as the
step S8 described above, for example);
[0604] (1-1-2) displaying the symbols associated with the scroll
line in the display region so as to move in a first mode along the
scroll line (such as step S6613 and step S6617 to be described
later, for example);
[0605] (1-1-3) stopping the symbols associated with at least one
scroll line from among the plurality of scroll lines and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region (such as step
S6727 to be described later, for example);
[0606] (1-1-4) as triggered by the fact that a li-zhi has been
established by the symbols displayed in a stopped state in
accordance with the processing operation (1-1-3), displaying
symbols associated with at least one scroll line from among scroll
lines corresponding to moving symbols so as to move in a second
mode that is different from the first mode (such as steps S6719 and
S6725 to be described later, for example); and
[0607] (1-1-5) automatically stopping the symbols associated with
at least one scroll line from among the plurality of scroll lines
and then rearranging the symbols determined in accordance with the
processing operation (1-1-1) (such as step S11 described above and
step S6727 to be described later, for example).
[0608] The gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a
display and a controller. The display has a display region on which
symbols are to be displayed. A result of a unit game that is
executed in the gaming machine is determined depending on
rearranged symbols. The unit game is a game whose one cycle is that
symbols to be rearranged are randomly determined, symbol movement
is started, and then the symbols are rearranged.
[0609] The display region of the display is equivalent to an
opening or a window in which symbols are formed to be visually
recognizable on a front face of a casing in which reels have been
arranged. In addition, in the case of video reels or the like, this
display region is equivalent to a display surface of a display
panel configured to display an image of the video reels.
[0610] It is preferable that the gaming machine have a start button
that a player can operate. Based on the fact that the controller
has received a signal indicating that the player has operated the
start button, it is preferable that the controller randomly
determine symbols to be rearranged and then control symbol display
in the display region.
[0611] In addition, it is preferable that the plurality of scroll
lines described above be formed in parallel to each other in the
display region. For example, one reel formed in a cylindrical shape
corresponds to one scroll line. In addition, an image of one reel
formed in the cylindrical shape (so called one video reel)
corresponds to one scroll line. In this way, the scroll lines in
the gaming machine according to the third embodiment may be the one
along which symbols can move, may be a mechanically formed reel or
may be a reel displayed as an image.
[0612] Further, it is preferable that the first mode be that
symbols move in a first direction at a predetermined speed along a
scroll line with which the symbols have been associated. It is
preferable that the first mode be a normal symbol movement mode in
the gaming machine. For example, it is preferable that the first
mode be a symbol movement mode (a reference mode) when a basic game
is performed in a normal play state.
[0613] A word "li-zhi" designates a state immediately before a
winning prize can be determined by means of visual recognition
after at least some symbols have been displayed in a stopped state.
The word "li-zhi" also designates a state in which symbols are
moving on a scroll line to be lastly stopped when a winning prize
can be determined by means of visual recognition. For example, in a
case where five scroll lines exist and a winning condition is that
five predetermined symbols are displayed in a stopped state, a
li-zhi is established when symbols associated with two scroll lines
are stopped and then four predetermined symbols are displayed in a
stopped state. In addition, even if three scroll lines of moving
symbols exist, a li-zhi may be occasionally established in
accordance with a winning condition. Therefore, a li-zhi is not
only established in a case where a plurality of, for example, five
scroll lines (for example, reels) exist, when four reels stop, but
a li-zhi may be occasionally established at a time point when one
to three reels have stopped, depending on a winning condition.
[0614] The first mode indicates a symbol movement mode, and may be
able to specify a symbol movement direction, a speed, a degree of
acceleration, a time interval to take until symbols stop, the
number of times in temporary stop, a time interval, a direction
when symbols move again, a speed, a degree of acceleration, a time
interval to take until symbols stop next, and a final stop or the
like. In particular, it is preferable that the first mode be a
reference mode. That is, when a normal unit game is performed, it
is preferable to display symbols in the first mode.
[0615] Similarly, the second mode also indicates a symbol movement
mode, and may be able to specify a symbol movement direction, a
speed, a degree of acceleration, or a stop and the like. The second
mode is different from the first mode. This difference between the
two modes is established if any one item is different from among
the symbol movement direction, the speed, the degree of
acceleration, and the stop, which specify the mode. For example,
there may be a case in which a reel rotation speed is
differentiated or a rotation direction is opposed.
[0616] The processing operation of (1-1-1) is to randomly determine
symbols to be rearranged. For example, random numbers are generated
and then symbols are determined by means of lottery processing or
the like. This processing operation is a processing operation of
determining symbols to be rearranged, and the contents of rendering
are not determined in this processing operation. Therefore, in the
processing operation of (1-1-1), only symbols to be rearranged are
determined, and the contents of rendering are not determined.
[0617] The processing operation of (1-1-2) is to display symbols
associated with a scroll line in a display region so as to move
along the scroll line in the first mode. The symbols are associated
with each of a plurality of scroll lines. For example, symbols
assigned to a reel are associated with the reel. Symbols of same
kind may be associated with different scroll lines. For example, a
symbol "7" may be associated with a first scroll line (a first
reel) or a second scroll line (a second reel). In addition, it is
preferable that a plurality of symbols be associated with each of
the scroll lines in predetermined sequential order. For example,
the plurality of symbols assigned on a reel are arranged to be
associated with the reel in predetermined sequential order.
Therefore, the symbols move in predetermined sequential order along
the scroll line.
[0618] The processing operation of (1-1-3) is to stop symbols
associated with at least one scroll line from among a plurality of
scroll lines and then display the stopped symbols in a display
region. A scroll line for stopping symbols may be at least one
scroll line.
[0619] The processing operation of (1-1-4) is a processing
operation to be made when a li-zhi has been established in
accordance with the symbols that have been displayed in a stopped
state in accordance with the processing operation of (1-1-3). There
is also a case in which the li-zhi is not established in accordance
with the processing operation of (1-1-3). In this case, the
processing operation of (1-1-4) is not executed. As triggered by
the fact that the li-zhi has been established in accordance with
the symbols that have been displayed in a stopped state, symbols
associated with at least one scroll line from among scroll lines on
which symbols are still moving are displayed in a display region so
as to move in the second mode that is different from the first
mode.
[0620] The processing operation of (1-1-5) is to automatically stop
and rearrange symbols on at least one scroll line from among a
plurality of scroll lines after symbol movement has been started. A
unit game is completed by rearrangement of symbols. As described
above, in principle, the symbols that have been determined in the
processing operation of (1-1-1) are automatically stopped and
rearranged without a player operation. In addition, even if symbols
are displayed in a stopped state by means of a player operation,
such symbols are displayed as to some of the plurality of scroll
lines, and the symbols that have been determined in the processing
operation of (1-1-1) are automatically stopped as to the remaining
scroll lines without a player operation.
[0621] In this manner, in the gaming machine according to the
embodiment, in principle, a player operation is not intervened; and
therefore, symbol arrangement itself is randomly determined in the
processing operation of (1-1-1) and then a prize is determined in
accordance with the determined symbols, and the symbols that have
been determined in the processing operation of (1-1-1) can be
rearranged.
[0622] After a li-zhi has been established in a unit game, symbols
are displayed while the first mode is changed to the second mode,
to thus able to prompt a player to concentrate his or her
consciousness to the unit game that attracts the player's
interest.
[0623] After a li-zhi has been established, symbols are displayed
while the first mode is changed to the second mode, thus enabling a
player to visually recognize moving symbols. The player is likely
to have a high interest in symbols to be rearranged after the
li-zhi has been established to indicate a high possibility that a
winning prize will be obtained. Thus, the player can watch an
outcome of symbols without keeping his or her eye off from the
symbols in which the player has such a high interest.
[0624] In this way, on the presupposition that the li-zhi has been
established, a symbol action occurs as the second mode. However, as
described later, in symbol actions in accordance with the first to
fifth display control processing operations, after it is determined
that the li-zhi has been established, in accordance with a prepared
action program, display control of symbols that are still moving is
performed by means of program-change from a program for the first
mode (a normal reel rotation program).
[0625] As control processing, while the number of scroll lines (the
number of reels) is defined as N, at a stage when the number of
scroll lines on which symbols have been stopped becomes N-n, it is
determined that a li-zhi has been established with reference to a
li-zhi determination table. This li-zhi determination table is a
table in which a combination between a symbol arrangement
coordinate and a prize has been associated with another. In a case
where a pattern in which symbols are stopped is random (that is,
symbols do not always stop in sequential order from the left), it
is determined which symbols are still moving (which reels are
rotating), a li-zhi determination table is extracted, and then a
determination is made in accordance with the extracted table.
[0626] In addition, at a stage when a li-zhi has been determined, a
li-zhi action on a plurality of scroll lines (a plurality of reels)
is randomly selected with the use of random numbers. That is, a
symbol action in accordance with the first to fifth display control
processing operations to be described later is randomly selected
with the use of random numbers when a li-zhi has been determined
(refer to step S6725 of FIG. 67). In this way, a processing
operation of randomly determining symbol arrangement and a
processing operation of determining a li-zhi action are
individually performed. Thus, there is a difference from
determining whether or not to take a li-zhi action together with
lottery processing for winning combination. In the embodiment, as
to the li-zhi action, in a case where it is determined that a
li-zhi has been established, a false rendering (a so called
simulation) does not exist, and if such a li-zhi has been
established, any li-zhi action is selected.
[0627] In addition, it is preferable that the processing operation
of (1-1-4) include processing operations of:
[0628] (1-2-1) determining whether or not a li-zhi has been
established by means of symbols having been displayed in a stopped
state every time the symbols associated with one scroll lines from
among the plurality of scroll lines are stopped (such as step S6719
to be described later, for example);
[0629] (1-2-2) displaying in the display region the symbols
associated with a scroll line on which symbols are moving, from
among the plurality of scroll lines, so as to move in the second
mode (such as steps S6725 and S6727 to be described later, for
example); and
[0630] (1-2-3) executing the processing operation of (1-2-2) when
it is determined that the li-zhi has been established in accordance
with the processing operation of (1-2-1) (such as steps S6719 and
S6725 to be described later, for example).
[0631] The processing operation of (1-2-1) is a processing
operation of determining whether or not a li-zhi has been
established by means of symbols having been displayed in a stopped
state every time the symbols stop.
[0632] The processing operation of (1-2-2) is a processing
operation of displaying symbols associated with a scroll line on
the symbols are moving in the second mode.
[0633] The processing operation of (1-2-3) is a processing
operation of displaying symbols so as to move in the second mode
when it is determined that the li-zhi has been established in
accordance with the processing operation of (1-2-1).
[0634] By doing this, symbols can be displayed so as to move in the
second mode only in a case where a li-zhi has been actually
established, and a suitable processing operation can be determined
and executed as required in accordance with the process of a unit
game.
[0635] Further, it is preferable that the second mode include a
plurality of post-li-zhi mode for defining a symbol movement mode
after a li-zhi has been established, and the processing operation
of (1-2-3) include a processing operation of (1-3-1) determining
one post-li-zhi mode that is randomly selected from the plurality
of post-li-zhi modes as the second mode (such as steps S6725 and
S6727 to be described later, for example).
[0636] The second mode includes a plurality of post-li-zhi modes.
Each of the plurality of post-li-zhi modes is a symbol movement
mode after a li-zhi has been established. The processing operation
of (1-3-1) is to randomly select one post-li-zhi mode from among a
plurality of post-li-zhi modes and then determine the selected
post-li-zhi mode as the second mode.
[0637] The processing operation of (1-3-1) is executed separately
from the processing operation (1-1-1) described above. That is, a
processing operation of selecting one post-li-zhi mode is made
separately from a processing operation of determining symbols to be
rearranged. By doing this, only a processing operation having been
required in accordance with the progress of a unit game can be
executed. In this manner, unit game processing can be performed
speedily and simply.
[0638] In addition, the processing operations of (1-1-1) and
(1-3-1) described above are executed by means of a common
controller. That is, both of the processing operations of (1-1-1)
and (1-3-1) are executed by means of a same controller. By doing
this, a configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.
[0639] <<Outline of First Display Control
Processing>>
[0640] It is preferable that the processing operation of displaying
symbols so as to move in the second mode have processing operations
of:
[0641] (1-4-1) displaying the symbols in the display region to move
by a predetermined distance (such as step S6815 to be described
later, for example);
[0642] (1-4-2) subsequent to the processing operation of (1-4-1),
stopping the symbols for a predetermined period of time and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region (such as steps
S6811 and S6813 to be described later, for example);
[0643] (1-4-3) executing the processing operations of (1-4-1) and
(1-4-2) at least once (such as step S6817 to be described later,
for example); and
[0644] (1-4-4) subsequent to the processing operation of (1-4-3),
stopping the determined symbols in the processing operation of
(1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the display
region (such as step S6727 to be described later, for example).
[0645] Symbols can be moved at a predetermined distance by
executing the processing operations of (1-4-1) to (1-4-3) described
above. For example, symbols can be moved gradually in a stepwise
manner by a predetermined distance by repeatedly executing the
processing operations of (1-4-1) and (1-4-2) a plurality of times.
Thus, by means of symbol movement that is different from that in a
normal mode (the first mode), it is possible to prompt a player to
concentrate his or her consciousness to a unit game that attracts
the player's interest.
[0646] <<Outline of Second Display Control
Processing>>
[0647] It is preferable that the processing operation of displaying
symbols so as to move in the second mode have processing operations
of:
[0648] (1-5-1) stopping the symbols and displaying the stopped
symbols in the display region (such as steps S6811 and S6919 to be
described later, for example);
[0649] (1-5-2) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a mode similar to the first mode (such as step S6915 to
be described later, for example);
[0650] (1-5-3) executing the processing operations of (1-5-1) and
(1-5-2) at least once (such as step S6921 to be described later,
for example); and
[0651] (1-5-4) after the processing operation of (1-5-3) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in accordance with the
processing operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped
symbols in the display region (such as step S6727 to be described
later, for example).
[0652] Stopping and moving of symbols (for example, re-spinning)
can be executed by executing the processing operations of (1-5-1)
to (1-5-3). For example, stopping and moving of symbols can be
repeated by repeatedly executing the processing operations of
(1-5-1) to (1-5-3) a plurality of times, and symbols are moved
differently from a normal mode (the first mode) to thereby able to
attract a player's interest a unit game.
[0653] <<Outline of Third Display Control
Processing>>
[0654] It is preferable that the processing operation of displaying
symbols so as to move in the second mode have processing operations
of:
[0655] (1-6-1) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move by a predetermined distance (such as step S7015 to be
described later, for example);
[0656] (1-6-2) subsequent to the processing operation of (1-6-1),
stopping the symbols for a predetermined period of time and then
displaying the stopped symbols in the display region (such as steps
S7011 and S7015 to be described later, for example);
[0657] (1-6-3) executing the processing operations of (1-6-1) and
(1-6-2) at least once (such as step S7017 to be described later,
for example);
[0658] (1-6-4) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a mode similar to the first mode (such as step S7021 to
be described later, for example);
[0659] (1-6-5) executing the processing operations of (1-6-1) to
(1-6-4) at least once (such as step S7019 to be described later,
for example); and
[0660] (1-6-6) after the processing operation of (1-6-5) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in the processing
operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the
display region (such as step S6727 to be described later, for
example).
[0661] In a case where the processing operations of (1-6-1) and
(1-6-2) have been repeatedly executed, symbols can be moved
gradually in a stepwise manner by a predetermined distance. In
addition, it is preferable that the processing operation of (1-6-4)
be to display symbols in a display region so as to move at a
distance that is longer than a predetermined distance. By doing
this, for example, after symbols have been moved at a short
distance, the symbols can be moved at a long distance. For example,
in a case where the processing operations of (1-6-1) to (1-6-4)
have been repeatedly executed, an operation of moving symbols
gradually in a stepwise manner by a predetermined distance and an
operation of moving the symbols at a long distance can be
repeatedly executed. By doing this, it is possible to prompt a
player to concentrate his or her consciousness to a unit game that
attracts the player's interest.
[0662] <<Outline of Fourth Display Control
Processing>>
[0663] It is preferable that the processing operation of displaying
symbols so as to move in the second mode have processing operations
of:
[0664] (1-7-1) stopping the symbols and then displaying the stopped
symbols in the display region (such as step S7111 to be described
later, for example);
[0665] (1-7-2) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a mode similar to the first mode (such as step S7115 to
be described later, for example);
[0666] (1-7-3) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move in a direction that is different from the one in the first
mode (such as step S7121 to be described later, for example);
[0667] (1-7-4) displaying the symbols in the display region so as
to move at a speed that is different from the one in the first mode
(such as step S7127 to be described later, for example);
[0668] (1-7-5) after the processing operation of (1-7-1) has been
executed, executing any of the processing operations (1-7-2) to
(1-7-4) (such as steps S7113 to S7129 to be described later, for
example);
[0669] (1-7-6) executing the processing operation of (1-7-5) at
least once (such as step S7131 to be described later, for example);
and
[0670] (1-7-7) after the processing operation of (1-7-6) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in the processing
operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the
display region (such as step S6727 to be described later, for
example).
[0671] After symbols have been temporarily stopped by executing the
processing operations of (1-7-1) to (1-7-5), the symbols are
displayed to move in a mode similar to the first mode, move in a
different direction, or move at a different speed; and therefore,
the symbols are moved differently from a normal mode (the first
mode), thereby enabling a player to pay his per her attention to a
unit game. There is also a possibility that symbols move in a
different mode every time the symbols move, by repeatedly executing
the processing operations of (1-7-1) to (1-7-5), a player can be
given a sense of expectation every time symbols move in a different
mode.
[0672] <<Outline of Fifth Display Control
Processing>>
[0673] It is preferable that the processing operation of displaying
symbols so as to move in the second mode have processing operations
of:
[0674] (1-8-1) displaying in the display region a predetermined
symbol from among symbols associated with a first scroll line from
among a plurality of scroll lines on which symbols are moving and a
symbol associated with the predetermined symbol from among symbols
associated with a second scroll that is different from the first
scroll line from among a plurality of scroll lines on symbols are
moving in parallel to each other (such as steps S7211 and S7213 to
be described later, for example);
[0675] (1-8-2) after the processing operations of (1-8-1) has been
executed, displaying the predetermined symbol and the symbol
associated with the predetermined symbol so as to move at a speed
that is different from a speed in the first mode (such as step
S7219 to be described later, for example); and
[0676] (1-8-3) after the processing operation of (1-8-2) has been
executed, stopping the determined symbols in the processing
operation of (1-1-1) and then displaying the stopped symbols in the
display region (such as step S6727 to be described later, for
example).
[0677] Symbols associated with each other can be displayed so as to
move in parallel to each other, for example, so as to move in phase
by executing the processing operations of (1-8-1) and (1-8-2). For
example, predetermined symbols "7" move in one column in a
horizontal direction, thus enabling a player to have a sense of
expectation that a result of a unit game may be advantageous.
[0678] <<Reel Rotation Start Processing>>
[0679] FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of reel rotation
start processing to be invoked and executed in step S9 of FIG. 47
described above.
[0680] First, the CPU 71 determines whether or not to normally
rotate reels (step S6611). Whether or not to normally rotate reels
can be determined in accordance with a result of lottery processing
that performed after generating random numbers.
[0681] When the CPU 71 determines that reels are normally rotated
(YES), the CPU 71 selects a normal rotation mode (step S6613). This
normal rotation is equivalent to a "first mode". On the other hand,
when the CPU 71 determines that no reel is normally rotated (NO),
the CPU 71 selects a special rotation mode (step S6615).
[0682] This special rotation mode includes a plurality of modes,
and includes sixth display control processing to twelfth display
control processing to be described later. In the processing
operation of step S6615, random numbers are generated and then from
among these processing operations, one processing operation is
selected as a special rotation mode. The sixth to twelfth display
control processing operations include those relating to rotation
stop processing as well as those relating to rotation start
processing. For example, the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and
eleventh display control processing operations are processing
operations relating to rotation stop processing. In addition, the
sixth, seventh, and twelfth display control processing operations
are processing operations relating to rotation start processing.
The sixth display control processing is a processing operation
including both of rotation start processing and rotation stop
processing.
[0683] All the contents of the special rotation modes including
rotation start processing and rotation stop processing are defined
in accordance with a processing operation of selecting a special
rotation mode in step S6615. That is, all display modes required in
a unit game can be defined while reels start rotation after an
operating button has been operated in the processing operation of
step S4. By doing this, a unit game can be completed without a need
to execute a processing operation of defining a display mode
partway of the unit game and then unit game processing can be
executed speedily and simply.
[0684] Next, the CPU 71 executes reel rotation processing in the
selected mode in step S6613 or S6615 (step S6617) and then
completes this subroutine.
[0685] <<Reel Rotation Stop Processing>>
[0686] FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of reel rotation
stop processing to be invoked and executed in step S11 of FIG. 47
described above.
[0687] First, the CPU 71 determines whether or not to normally stop
reels (step S6711). This determination processing is a processing
operation of randomly determining whether or not to generate random
numbers, normally stopping reels by means of lottery processing,
and then determine a result of the random determination.
[0688] When the CPU 71 determines that the reels are normally
stopped (YES), the CPU 71 selects a normal stop mode (step S6713).
This normal stop mode is equivalent to a "first mode". On the other
hand, when the CPU 71 determines that no reels are normally stopped
(NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to migrate to step S6717 to be
described later.
[0689] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a timing of
stopping the reels is established (step S6717). When the CPU 71
determines that no timing of stopping the reels is established
(NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step S6717.
[0690] When the CPU 71 determines that the timing of stopping the
reels is established (YES), the CPU 71 determines whether or not a
li-zhi has been established based on symbols on a reel having
already stopped (step S6719). When the CPU 71 determines that the
timing of stopping the reels is not established (NO), the CPU 71
causes the routine to migrate to step S6727. By doing this, the
reels can be stopped in a normal stop mode or in a special stop
mode.
[0691] Determination of whether or not the li-zhi has been
established in step S6719 can be made by means of only symbols
having already stopped as long as they are normal symbols. A
predetermined winning combination has been determined in accordance
with the combination determination processing of step S8 described
above, so that whether or not the li-zhi has been established can
be determined by comparing the symbols that are arranged along a
winning line and the symbols forming a winning combination.
Therefore, as a result of the comparison, when one symbol is not
determined from among the symbols forming a winning combination, it
can be determined that a li-zhi has been established.
[0692] In contrast, in a case where scatter symbols have been
employed, whether or not a li-zhi has been established can be
determined by counting the number of scatter symbols from the
symbols on a reel having already stopped. With the use of code
numbers of symbols on the reel having already stopped, the number
of scatter symbols that have already been displayed in a stopped
state (the number of symbols having already been stopped) can be
counted by referring to a data table shown in FIG. 42. As described
above, in a case where the scatter symbols have been employed, it
is determined whether or not a winning prize has been established
in accordance with the number of scatter symbols having been
rearranged. That is, a winning prize can be obtained when the
number of scatter symbols having been rearranged is greater than a
predetermined number (the number of winning scatter symbols). In
addition, the number of scatter symbols to be displayed in a
stopped state from now (the number of scatter symbols to be
stopped) can be obtained from a combination that is determined in
accordance with the determination processing of step S8. The number
of scatter symbols having been stopped and the number of scatter
symbols to be stopped, described above, can be obtained by
referring to the data table shown in FIG. 42 with the use of code
numbers indicating symbols. In this way, in the case of a unit game
using scatter symbols, it can be determined whether or not a li-zhi
has been established from the number of scatter symbols having been
stopped and the number of scatter symbols to be stopped.
[0693] When the CPU 71 determines that the li-zhi has been
established (YES), the CPU 71 determines whether or not the normal
stop mode described above has been selected (step S6721). When the
CPU 71 determines that no normal stop mode has been selected (NO),
the CPU 71 causes the routine to migrate to step S6727. By doing
this, when a special stop mode has already been selected, it is
possible to disable determination of whether or not li-zhi
rendering is performed in the processing operation of the step
S6723 described above. Li-zhi rendering is included in the special
stop mode that is selected in the processing operation of the step
S6715 described above, whereby, even in a case where it is
determined that li-zhi rendering is not performed in the
determination of step S6723, li-zhi rendering itself can be
executed.
[0694] When the CPU 71 determines that the normal stop mode has
been selected (YES), the CPU 71 determines whether or not to
perform li-zhi rendering (step S6723). Whether or not li-zhi
rendering is performed may be determined based on a result of
lottery processing performed after random numbers have been
generated. When the CPU 71 determines that no li-zhi rendering is
performed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to migrate to step
S6727 to be described later.
[0695] When the CPU 71 determines that li-zhi rendering is
performed (YES), the CPU 71 selects a rendering mode (step S6725).
This li-zhi rendering mode is equivalent to a "second mode". The
li-zhi rendering mode includes a plurality of modes, and includes
the first to first display control processing operations to be
described later. In the processing operation of step S6725, random
numbers are generated and then one processing operation from these
processing operations are selected as a li-zhi rendering mode by
means of lottery processing.
[0696] Next, the CPU 71 executes reel stop control in a selected
mode (step S6727). Reels are stopped in a variety of modes selected
in the step S6713 or S6725 described above.
[0697] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not reels have
stopped (step S6729). When the CPU 71 determines that no reels have
stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S6729. When the CPU 71 determines that the reels have stopped
(YES), the CPU 71 determines whether or not all of the reels have
stopped (step S6731).
[0698] When the CPU 71 determines that all of the reels have not
stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to the step
S6717 described above. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that all of the reels have stopped (YES), the CPU 71
completes this subroutine.
[0699] <<First Display Control Processing>>
[0700] FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of first display
control processing. This subroutine is selected in the processing
operation of step S6725 in FIG. 67 and the selected subroutine is
invoked and executed in step S6727.
[0701] The first display control processing is a processing
operation relating to stop control of a next reel after a li-zhi
has established. That is, this control processing is a processing
operation relating to control of a reel targeted for next stop
control (hereinafter, referred to as a reel targeted for control)
when a li-zhi has been established by means of stop control of at
least one reel from among a plurality of reels.
[0702] <Outline of First Display Control Processing>
[0703] After a li-zhi has been established, a reel targeted for
control repeats an action for the reel to move slowly, temporarily
stop before a winning line on which a bonus symbol having already
stopped is positioned, and then advance frames on a one by one
frame basis every 0.5 second.
[0704] In the first display control processing, a winning line is
referred to as each of three lines extending horizontally at upper,
middle, and lower stages (refer to FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (b-6)).
In addition, in FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (b-6), a first reel M3a, a
second reel M3b, a third reel M3c, a fourth reel M3d, and a fifth
reel M3e are arranged in sequential order from the left. Further,
as described above, when five or more bonus symbols have been
rearranged, a bonus-in is established and the routine migrates to a
bonus game. In FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (b-6), symbols marked with
open circles "O" indicate bonus symbols.
[0705] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (b-6). As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the first
reel M3a and the second reel M3b that is the right next thereto
stop and then a li-zhi is established. At this time point, as shown
in FIG. 81 (a), the third reel M3c to the fifth reel M3e are still
rotating. The first reel M3a and the second reel M3b have stopped,
whereby the reels targeted for control become the third reel M3c to
the fifth reel M3e. Hereinafter, the third reel M3c will be
described as a reel targeted for control. On the first reel M3a,
bonus symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and lower stages, and
on the second reel M3b, a bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the
middle stage. Therefore, a total of three bonus symbols "O" are
displayed in a stopped state.
[0706] Next, after the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for
control has been rotated at a rotating side that is slower than a
normal rotation speed, the reel is temporarily stopped, and then a
symbol "BAR" is positioned at the middle stage (FIG. 81 (b-1)).
Next, after 0.5 seconds, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted
for control rotates in a downward direction by one frame, a symbol
"7" is positioned at the upper stage, and then, the symbol "BAR"
having been positioned at the middle stage is positionally shifted
to the lower stage (FIG. 81 (b-2)).
[0707] Next, after 0.5 seconds, the third reel M3c that is a reel
targeted for control rotates in a downward direction by one frame,
and the symbol "7" having been positioned at the upper stage is
positioned at the middle stage (FIG. 81 (b-3)). Further, after 0.5
second, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
rotates in a downward direction by one frame, a bonus symbol "O" is
positioned at the upper stage, and the symbol "7" having been
positioned at the middle stage is positionally shifted at the lower
stage (FIG. 81 (b-4)).
[0708] Further, after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c that is a reel
targeted for control rotates in a downward direction by one frame,
and the bonus symbol having been positioned at the upper stage is
positionally shifted to the middle stage (FIG. 81 (b-5)). Further,
after 0.5 seconds, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for
control rotates in a downward direction by one frame, the bonus
symbols "O" is positioned at the upper stage, and the bonus symbol
having been positioned at the middle stage is positionally shifted
to the lower stage (FIG. 81 (b-6)).
[0709] As shown in FIG. 81 (b-6), the bonus symbols "O" are
positioned at the upper and lower stages of the first reel M3a, the
bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the middle stage of the second
reel M3b, and the bonus symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and
lower stages of the third reel M3c. In this manner, five bonus
symbols "O" have been displayed in a stopped state, a bonus-in
condition is met, and then the routine can migrate to a bonus
game.
[0710] The "one frame" described above is referred to as an
interval of a minimum unit of a position at which symbols can stop,
and is also referred to as an interval of the adjacent positions at
which symbols can stop along a movement direction (a rotation
direction) of a reel M3 when the reel has stopped. For example,
this interval is referred to as an interval of winning lines that
are adjacent to each other along the movement direction (the
rotation direction) of the reel. More specifically, when three
winning lines are set at the upper, middle, and lower stages, an
interval between the upper and middle stages or an interval between
the middle and lower stages becomes one frame.
[0711] <Steps of First Display Control Processing>
[0712] Specifically, first display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 68. The steps of the first
display control processing are as follows.
[0713] First, after the CPU 71 has operated a reel targeted for
control on a rotating side that is slower than a normal rotation
speed, the CPU 71 stops the rotating reel at a predetermined
position (step S6811).
[0714] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined
period of time, for example, 0.5 second has elapsed (step
S6813).
[0715] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined
period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to revert to step S6813. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that the predetermined period of time has elapsed (YES),
the CPU 71 rotates the reel targeted for control by one frame and
then stops the rotating reel again (step S6815).
[0716] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined
reel stop condition has been met (step S6817). The predetermined
reel stop condition includes a condition for establishing a
bonus-in or the like.
[0717] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined reel
stop condition has not been met (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to revert to step S6813. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that the predetermined reel stop condition has been met
(YES), the CPU 71 determines whether or not a rotating reel exists
(step S6819).
[0718] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that a rotating reel exists
(YES), the CPU 71 changes a reel targeted for control (step S6821)
and then causes the routine to revert to the step S6811 described
above. On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines that no
rotating reel exists (NO), i.e., when the CPU 71 stops all of the
reels and then determines that symbol rearrangement has completed,
the CPU 71 completes this subroutine.
[0719] By making such a processing operation, the reels can be
controlled to be moved on a one by one frame basis and stopped so
as to gradually close to a predetermined reel stop condition, for
example, a condition for establishing a bonus-in; and a player can
be given a sense of expectation.
[0720] <<Second Display Control Processing>>
[0721] FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of second
display control processing. This subroutine is selected in the
processing operation of step S6725 in FIG. 67 and then the selected
subroutine is invoked and executed in step S6727.
[0722] The second display control processing is also a processing
operation relating to stop control of a next reel after a li-zhi
has been established. That is, this processing is a processing
operation relating to control of a reel targeted for next stop
control (hereinafter, referred to as a reel targeted for control)
when a li-zhi has been established by controlling at least one reel
to be stopped from among a plurality of reels.
[0723] <Outline of Second Display Control Processing>
[0724] After a li-zhi has been established, a reel targeted for
control repeats an action for the reel to temporarily stopping and
then rotating again, temporarily stopping again, and further,
rotating again. Every time the reel targeted for control stops,
symbols are displayed in a stopped state so as to gradually close
to a predetermined reel stop condition, for example, a condition
for establishing a bonus-in.
[0725] In FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (b-7), a first reel M3a, a second
reel M3b, a third reel M3c, a fourth reel M3d, and a fifth reel M3e
are arranged in sequential order from the left. Further, as
described above, when five or more bonus symbols have been
rearranged, a bonus-in is established and then the routine migrates
to a bonus game. In FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (b-7), symbols marked
with open circles "O" indicate bonus symbols.
[0726] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (b-7). As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the first
reel M3a and the second reel M3b that is the right next thereto
stop and then a li-zhi is established. At this time point, as shown
in FIG. 82 (a), the third reel M3c to the fifth reel M3e are still
rotating. The first reel M3a and the second reel M3b have stopped,
whereby the reels targeted for control become the third reel M3c to
the fifth reel M3e. Hereinafter, the third reel M3c will be
described as a reel targeted for control. On the first reel M3a,
bonus symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and lower stages, and
on the second reel M3b, a bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the
middle stage. Therefore, a total of three bonus symbols "O" are
displayed in a stopped state.
[0727] Next, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
temporarily stops (a first time of stop) and then a symbol "BAR" is
positioned at the middle stage (FIG. 82 (b-1)). Next, after a
predetermined period of time has elapsed, the third reel M3e that
is a reel targeted for control rotates again (FIG. 82 (b-2)).
[0728] Next, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
temporarily stops again (a second time of stop), a symbols "7" is
positioned at the upper stage, and a symbol "BAR" is positioned at
the lower stage (FIG. 82 (b-3)). At the second time of stop, the
third reel M3a that is a reel targeted for control stops at a
position at which the reel has rotated in a downward direction by
one frame more than at the first time of stop described above (FIG.
82 (b-1). Next, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed,
the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control rotates
again (FIG. 82 (b-4)).
[0729] Next, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
temporarily stops again (a third time of stop) and then a symbol
"7" is positioned at the middle stage (FIG. 82 (b-5)). At the third
time of stop, the third reel M3e that is a reel targeted for
control stops at a position at which the reel has rotate in a
downward direction by one frame more than at the second time of
stop described above (FIG. 82 (b-3). Next, after a predetermined
period of time has elapsed, the third reel M3c that is a reel
targeted for control rotates again (FIG. 82 (b-6)).
[0730] Next, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
temporarily stops again (a fourth time of stop), a bonus symbol "O"
is positioned at the upper stage, and then, a symbol "7" is
positioned at the lower stage (FIG. 82 (b-7)). At the fourth time
of stop, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
stops at a position at which the reel has rotated in a downward
direction by one frame more than at the third time of stop (FIG. 82
(b-5)) described above.
[0731] Further, when the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for
control has been stopped by making a similar processing operation,
the bonus symbols "O" can be positioned at the upper and lower
stages (not shown), a condition for establishing a bonus-in can be
met, and then the routine can migrate to a bonus game.
[0732] The "one frame" described above is referred to as an
interval of a minimum unit of a position at which symbols can stop,
and is also referred to as an interval of the adjacent positions at
which symbols can stop along a movement direction (a rotation
direction) of a reel M3 when the reel has stopped. For example,
this interval is referred to as an interval of winning lines that
are adjacent to each other along the movement direction (the
rotation direction) of the reel. More specifically, when three
winning lines are set at the upper, middle, and lower stages, an
interval between the upper and middle stages or an interval between
the middle and lower stages becomes one frame.
[0733] <Steps of Second Display Control Processing>
[0734] Specifically, second display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 69. The steps of the second
display control processing are as follows.
[0735] First, the CPU 71 stops a reel targeted for control at a
predetermined position (step S6911).
[0736] Next, the CPU 71 determines a first predetermined period of
time, for example, 0.5 second has elapsed (step S6913).
[0737] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the first predetermine
period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to revert to step S6913. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that the first predetermined period of time has elapsed
(YES), the CPU 71 rotates a reel targeted for control (step
S6915).
[0738] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a second period
of time, for example, 0.5 second has elapsed (step S6917).
[0739] Next, the CPU 71 stop-controls the reel targeted for control
so as to stop at a position at which the reel has been rotated by
one frame more than at which the reel targeted for control has been
stopped previously (step S6919).
[0740] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined
reel stop condition has been met (step S6921). The predetermined
reel stop condition includes a condition for establishing a
bonus-in, for example.
[0741] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined reel
stop condition has not been met (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to revert to step S6913. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that the predetermined reel stop condition has been met
(YES), the CPU 71 determines whether or not a rotating reel still
exists (step S6923).
[0742] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the rotating reel
exists (YES), the CPU 71 changes the reel targeted for control
(step S6925) and then causes the routine to revert to the step
S6911 described above. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that no rotating reel exists (NO), i.e., when the CPU 71
stops all reels and then determines that symbol rearrangement has
completed, the CPU 71 competes this subroutine.
[0743] By making such a processing operation, while a player is
given a sense of uneasiness that no bonus-in may be established
every time a reel targeted for control rotates, a reel targeted for
control is controlled to be stopped so as to close to a
predetermined reel stop condition, for example, a condition for
establishing a bonus-in on a one by one frame basis every time the
reel is stopped after being rotated, so that the player can be
given a higher sense of expectation again.
[0744] <<Third Display Control Processing>>
[0745] FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of third display
control processing. This subroutine is selected in the processing
operation of step S6725 in FIG. 67 and then the selected subroutine
is invoked and executed in step S6727.
[0746] The third display control processing is a processing
operation relating to stop control a next reel after a li-zhi has
been established. That is, this control processing is a processing
operation relating to control of a reel targeted for next stop
control (hereinafter, referred to as a reel targeted for control)
when a li-zhi has been established by controlling at least one reel
to be stopped from among a plurality of reels.
[0747] <Outline of Third Display Control Processing>
[0748] After a li-zhi has been established, a reel targeted for
control repeats an action for the reel to temporarily stop before a
winning line on which a bonus symbol of a reel having already
stopped is positioned, then advance on a one by one frame basis
every 0.5 second, then temporarily stop before the winning line on
which the bonus symbol having already stopped is positioned, and
then, advance on a one by one frame basis every 0.5 second. For
example, the above reel repeats an action of frame feeding and
re-rotation (re-spinning). A "frame feeding" is an operation or the
like of advancing on a one by one frame basis every 0.5 second.
[0749] In the first display control processing, a "winning line" is
referred to as each of three lines extending horizontally at the
upper, middle, and lower stages (refer to FIG. 83 (a) to FIG. 83
(b-9)). In addition, in FIG. 83 (a) to FIG. 83 (b-9), a first reel
M3a, a second reel M3b, a third reel M3c, a fourth reel M3d, and a
fifth reel M3e are arranged in sequential order from the left.
Further, as described above, when five or more bonus symbols have
been rearranged, a bonus-in is established and then the routine
migrates to a bonus game. In FIG. 83 (a) to FIG. 83 (b-9), symbols
marked with open circles "O" indicate bonus symbols.
[0750] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 83 (a) to FIG. 83 (b-9). As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the first
reel M3a and the second reel M3b that is the right next thereto
stop and then a li-zhi is established. At this time point, as shown
in FIG. 83 (a), the third reel M3c to the fifth reel M3e are still
rotating. The first reel M3a and the second reel M3b have stopped,
whereby the reels targeted for control become the third reel M3c to
the fifth reel M3e. Hereinafter, the third reel M3c will be
described as a reel targeted for control. On the first reel M3a,
bonus symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and lower stages, and
on the second reel M3b, a bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the
middle stage. Therefore, a total of three bonus symbols "O" are
displayed in a stopped state.
[0751] Next, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
temporarily stops and then a symbol "7" is positioned at the middle
stage (FIG. 83 (b-1)). Next, after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c
that is a reel targeted for control rotates in a downward direction
by one frame, a bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the upper stage,
and then the symbol "7" having been positioned at the middle stage
is positionally shifted to the lower stage (FIG. 83 (b-2)).
[0752] Next, after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c that is a reel
targeted for control rotates in a downward direction by one frame
and then a bonus symbol "O" having been positioned at the upper
stage is positionally shifted to the middle stage (FIG. 83 (b-3)).
Further, after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c that is a reel
targeted for control rotates in a downward direction by one frame,
a bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the upper stage, and then, the
bonus symbol "O" having been positioned at the middle stage is
positionally shifted to the lower stage (FIG. 83 (b-4)).
[0753] Next, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
rotates again (FIG. 83 (b-5) and then temporarily stops, and a
symbol "7" is positioned at the middle stage (FIG. 83 (b-6)). Next,
after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for
control rotates in a downward direction by one frame, a bonus
symbol "O" is positioned at the upper stage, and then, the symbol
"7" having been positioned at the middle stage is positionally
shifted to the lower stage (FIG. 83 (b-7)).
[0754] Next, after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c that is a reel
targeted for control rotates in a downward by one frame and then
the bonus symbols having positioned at the upper stage is
positionally shifted to the middle stage (FIG. 83 (b-8)). Further,
after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for
control rotates in a downward direction by one frame, a bonus
symbol "O" is positioned at the upper stage, and then, the bonus
symbol "O" having been positioned at the middle stage is
positionally shifted to the lower stage (FIG. 83 (b-9)).
[0755] As shown in FIG. 83 (b-9), bonus symbols "O" are positioned
at the upper and lower stages of the first reel Mia; a bonus symbol
"O" is positioned at the middle stage of the second reel M3b; and
bonus symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and lower stages of
the third reel M3c. In this way, five bonus symbols have been
displayed in a stopped state; a condition for establishing a
bonus-in is met; and then, the routine can migrate to a bonus
game.
[0756] The "one frame" described above is referred to as an
interval of a minimum unit of a position at which symbols can stop,
and is also referred to as an interval of the adjacent positions at
which symbols can stop along a movement direction (a rotation
direction) of a reel M3 when the reel has stopped. For example,
this interval is referred to as an interval of winning lines that
are adjacent to each other along the movement direction (the
rotation direction) of the reel. More specifically, when three
winning lines are set at the upper, middle, and lower stages, an
interval between the upper and middle stages or an interval between
the middle and lower stages becomes one frame.
[0757] <Steps of Third Display Control Processing>
[0758] Specifically, third display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 70. The steps of the third
display control processing are as follows.
[0759] First, after the CPU 71 has operated a reel targeted for
control on a rotating side that is slower than a normal rotation
speed, the CPU 71 stops the rotating reel at a predetermined
position (step S7011).
[0760] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a first
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.5 second has elapsed
(step S7013).
[0761] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the first
predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71
causes the routine to revert to step S7013. On the other hand, when
the CPU 71 determines that the first predetermined period of time
has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 rotates the reel targeted for control
by one frame and then stops the rotating reel again (step
S7015).
[0762] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined
reel stop condition has been met (step S7017). The predetermined
reel stop condition includes a condition for establishing a
bonus-in or the like.
[0763] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined reel
stop condition has not been met (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to revert to step S7013. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that the predetermined reel stop condition has been met
(YES), the CPU determines whether or not a predetermined completion
condition has been met (step S7019). The predetermined completion
condition can be met when the number of times of execution of a
processing operation in step S7021 to be described later reaches a
predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times
include three times, for example. By doing this, the processing
operations of steps S7011 to S7023 can be repeated until the number
of times of rotation of a reel targeted for control has reached a
predetermined number of times.
[0764] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined completion
condition has not been met in the determination processing of step
S7019 (NO), the CPU 71 rotates a reel targeted for control (step
S7021).
[0765] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a second
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.5 second has elapsed
(step S7023).
[0766] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the second
predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71
causes the routine to revert to step S7023. On the other hand, when
the CPU 71 determines that the second predetermined period of time
has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7011.
[0767] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined completion
condition has been met in the determination processing of the step
S7019 described above (YES), the CPU 71 determines whether or not a
rotating reel exist (step S7025).
[0768] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the rotating reel
exists (YES), the CPU 71 changes a reel targeted for control (step
S7027) and then causes the routine to revert to the step S7011
described above. On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines that
no rotating reel exists (NO), i.e., when the CPU 71 stops all of
reels and then determines that symbol rearrangement has completed,
the CPU 71 completes this subroutine.
[0769] By making such a processing operation, although a
predetermined reel stop condition is temporarily met, a reel
targeted for control is rotated again, thus making a player feel
uneasiness. In addition, the predetermined reel stop condition is
met by making a similar movement, thus enabling a player to have a
higher sense of expectation.
[0770] <<Fourth Display Control Processing>>
[0771] FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of fourth
display control processing. This subroutine is selected in the
processing operation of step S6725 in FIG. 67 and then the selected
subroutine is invoked and executed in step S6727.
[0772] The fourth display control processing is a processing
operation relating to next reel stop control after a li-zhi has
been established. That is, this control processing is a processing
operation relating to control of a reel targeted for next stop
control (hereinafter, referred to as a reel targeted for control)
when a li-zhi has been established by controlling at least one reel
to be stopped from among a plurality of reels.
[0773] <Outline of Fourth Display Control Processing>
[0774] After a li-zhi has been established, a reel targeted for
control repeats an action for the reel to temporarily stop, then
rotate in a forward direction again, then temporarily stop, then
rotate in a backward direction again, then temporarily stop, then
rotate slowly in the forward direction, and then, stop. At this
time, a position at which the reel targeted for control stops is
made different from another one every time the reel targeted for
control stops. For example, the reel targeted for control stops so
as to close onto a winning line on which a prize can be obtained,
every time the reel targeted for control stops.
[0775] In the fourth display control processing as well, a winning
line is referred to as each of three lines extending horizontally
at the upper, middle, and lower stages (refer to FIG. 84 (a) to
FIG. 84 (b-7). In addition, in FIG. 84 (a) to FIG. 84 (b-7), a
first reel M3a, a second reel M3b, a third reel M3c, a fourth reel
M3d, and a fifth reel M3e are arranged in sequential order from the
left. Further, as described above, when five or more bonus symbols
have been rearranged, a bonus-in is established and then the
routine migrates to a bonus game. In FIG. 84 (a) to FIG. 84 (b-7),
symbols marked with open circles "O" indicate bonus symbols.
[0776] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 84 (a) to FIG. 84 (b-7). As shown in FIG. 84 (a), the first
reel M3a and the second reel M3b that is the right next thereto
stop and then a li-zhi is established. At this time point, as shown
in FIG. 84 (a), the third reel M3c to the fifth reel M3e are still
rotating. The first reel M3a and the second reel M3b have stopped,
whereby the reels targeted for control become the third reel M3c to
the fifth reel M3e. Hereinafter, the third reel M3c will be
described as a reel targeted for control. On the first reel M3a,
bonus symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and lower stages, and
on the second reel M3b, a bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the
middle stage. Therefore, a total of three bonus symbols "O" are
displayed in a stopped state.
[0777] Next, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
temporarily stops and then a symbol "BAR" is positioned at the
middle stage (FIG. 84 (b-1)). Next, after a predetermined period of
time, for example, after 0.5 second, the third reel M3c that is a
reel targeted for control rotates (FIG. 84 (b-2)) in a forward
direction (for example, in a downward direction).
[0778] Next, after a predetermined period of time, the third reel
M3c that is a reel targeted for control temporarily stops and then
a symbol "BAR" is positioned at the middle stage (FIG. 84 (b-3)).
Next, after a predetermined period of time, for example, after 0.5
second, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
rotates (FIG. 84 (b-4)) in a backward direction (for example, in an
upward direction)).
[0779] Next, after a predetermined period of time, the third reel
M3c that is a reel targeted for control temporarily stops and then
a symbol "BAR" is positioned at the middle stage (FIG. 84 (b-5)).
Next, after a predetermined period of time, for example, after 0.5
second, the third reel M3c that is a reel targeted for control
rotates slowly (FIG. 84 (b-6)) in a forward direction (for example,
in an upward direction)).
[0780] Next, after a predetermined period of time, the third reel
M3c that is a reel targeted for control stops and then bonus
symbols "O" are displayed in a stopped state at the upper and lower
stages (FIG. 84 (b-7)).
[0781] FIG. 84 (b-1), FIG. 84 (b-3), and FIG. 84 (b-5) showed a
case in which symbols of same kind "BAR" are displayed in a stopped
state at the middle stage. As described above, it is preferable
that symbols of different kinds be displayed in a stopped so that
stopped positions are different from each other every time a reel
targeted for control stops. In particular, it is preferable that a
current condition be gradually close to a condition for
establishing a bonus-in every time a reel targeted for control
stops.
[0782] As shown in FIG. 84 (b-7), bonus symbols "O" are positioned
at the upper and lower stages of the first reel M3a; a bonus symbol
"O" is positioned at the middle stage of the second reel M3b; and
bonus symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and lower stages of
the third reel M3c. In this manner, five bonus symbols have been
displayed in a stopped state, a condition for establishing a
bonus-in is met, and then, the routine can migrates to a bonus
game.
[0783] <Steps of Fourth Display Control Processing>
[0784] Specifically, fourth display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 71. The steps of the fourth
display control processing are as follows.
[0785] First, the CPU 71 stops a reel targeted for control at a
predetermined position (step S7111).
[0786] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a first
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.5 second has elapsed
(step S7113).
[0787] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the first
predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71
causes the routine to revert to step S7113. On the other hand, when
the CPU 71 determines that the first predetermined period of time
has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 rotates a reel targeted for control
in a forward direction (step S7115). The forward direction used
herein designates a direction in which a reel targeted for control
rotates in a downward direction in a display window 150, for
example.
[0788] Next, the CPU 71 stops the reel targeted for control at a
predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has
elapsed after rotation of the reel targeted for control has been
started (step S7117).
[0789] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether a second predetermined
period of time, for example, 0.5 second has been elapsed (step
S7119).
[0790] Next, when the CPU 71 determine that the second
predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71
causes the routine to revert to step S7119. On the other hand, when
the CPU 71 determines that the second predetermined period of time
has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 rotates the reel targeted for control
in a backward direction (step S7121). The backward direction used
herein designates a direction in which the reel targeted for
control rotates in an upward direction in the display window 150,
for example.
[0791] Next, the CPU 71 stops the reel targeted for control at a
predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has
elapsed after rotation of the reel targeted for control has been
started (step S7123).
[0792] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a third
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.5 second has elapsed
(step S7125).
[0793] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the third period of
time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert
to step S7125. On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines that
the third period of time has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 rotates the
reel targeted for control slowly (step S7127). A rotation speed in
the processing operation of step S7127 may be a speed that is
slower than a rotation speed in step S7115 or step S7121. In
addition, with the rotation speed of the reel targeted for control
being slowed down gradually, the reel targeted for control may be
stopped in the processing operation of the next step S7129.
[0794] Next, the CPU 71 stops the reel targeted for control at a
predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has
elapsed after rotation of the reel targeted for control has been
started (step S7129).
[0795] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a completion
condition has been met (step S7131). The completion condition used
herein designates that a stop position of the reel targeted for
control has been determine at a position at which a condition for
establishing a bonus-in is met. That is, this determination
processing is to determine whether or not the reel targeted for
control has stopped at the position at which the condition for
establishing a bonus-in is met in accordance with the processing
operation of S7129.
[0796] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the completion
condition has not been met (NO), the CPI 71 causes the routine to
revert to step S7113. On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines
that the completion condition has been met (YES), the CPU 71
determines whether or not a rotating reel exists (step S7133).
[0797] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the rotating reel
exists (YES), the CPU 71 changes the reel targeted for control
(step S7135) and then causes the routine to revert to the step
S7111 described above. On the other hand, when the CPU 71
determines that the rotating reel does not exist (NO), i.e., when
the CPU 71 stops all reels and then determines that symbol
rearrangement has completed, the CPU 71 completes this
subroutine.
[0798] While the example described above showed a case in which the
processing operations of steps S7113 to S7129 are executed in
sequential order, any one processing operation may be selected and
executed from among processing operations of: executing lottery
processing every time until the completion condition of step S7131
has been established and then rotating a reel targeted for control
in a forward direction (step S7115); rotating the reel targeted for
control in a backward direction (step S7121); and rotating the reel
targeted for control slowly in the forward direction (step S7127).
By doing this, a reel movement mode is randomly selected until the
completion condition of step S7131, thus enabling a player to
visually recognize the reel movement to thereby able to impart a
tense atmosphere and to enhance a sense of expectation.
[0799] In the processing operations of the steps S7117, S7123, and
S7129 described above, a position for stopping the reel targeted
for control is predetermined. The position for stopping the reel
targeted for control may be randomly determined. In addition, the
position for stopping the reel targeted for control may be
determined so as to be gradually close to a position meeting a
condition for establishing a bonus-in every time the reel targeted
for control stops, i.e., so as to be gradually close onto a winning
line on which a prize can be obtained. In this way, a player's
sense of expectation can be enhanced by stopping the reel targeted
for control.
[0800] In this way, the reel targeted for reel is forwardly
rotated, is backwardly rotated, or is slowly rotated to be thereby
able to impart a sense of enhance a sense of expectation while
imparting a sense of uneasiness to a player.
[0801] <<Fifth Display Control Processing>>
[0802] FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of fifth display
control processing. This subroutine is selected in the processing
operation of step S6725 in FIG. 67 and then the selected subroutine
is invoked and executed in step S6727.
[0803] The fifth display control processing is a processing
operation relating to next reel stop control after a li-zhi has
been established. That is, this control operation is a processing
operation relating to control of a reel targeted for next stop
control (hereinafter, referred to as a reel targeted for control
when a li-zhi has been established by controlling at least one reel
to be stopped from among a plurality of reels. In the first to
fourth display control processing operations described above, the
number of reels targeted for control is always one, and when a
plurality of reels rotate after a li-zhi has been established, the
plurality of reels each are sequentially selected as a reel
targeted for control and then are controlled to be stopped. The
fifth display control processing is to control at least two reels
to be stopped as reels targeted for control when a plurality of
reels rotates after a li-zhi has been established.
[0804] <Outline of Fifth Display Control Processing>
[0805] After a li-zhi has been established, while all of the
remaining reels rotate as reels targeted for control, symbols are
adjusted to be formed in a horizontal direction. For example, as to
symbols "7" of same kind assigned to the respective three reels,
three reels rotate while three symbols "7"-"7"-"7" of same kind are
formed in a horizontal direction and then these reels stop at the
same time.
[0806] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 85 (a) to FIG. 85 (c). As shown in FIG. 85 (a), a first reel
M3a and a second reel M3b that is the right next thereto stop and
then a li-zhi is established. At this time point, as shown in FIG.
85 (a), a third reel M3c and a fifth reel M3e are still rotating.
The first reel M3a and the second reel M3b have stopped, whereby
the reels targeted for control become the third reel M3c to the
fifth reel M3e. Hereinafter, the third reel M3c will be described
as a reel targeted for control. On the first reel M3a, bonus
symbols "O" are positioned at the upper and lower stages, and on
the second reel M3b, a bonus symbol "O" is positioned at the middle
stage. Therefore, a total of three bonus symbols "O" are displayed
in a stopped state.
[0807] Next, the third reel M3e, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth
reel M3e that are reels targeted for control adjust rotation speeds
of the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e
so that symbols are formed along a horizontal direction while
mainlining their rotating states (step S85 (b)).
[0808] Next, when the symbols are formed along the horizontal
direction, the rotation speeds of the third reel M3c, the fourth
reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are equalized (FIG. 85 (c)) and
then the equalized rotation speeds of the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are gradually slowed down
at the same time, and the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and
the fifth reel M3e are stopped at the same time.
[0809] <Steps of Fifth Display Control Processing>
[0810] Specifically, fifth display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 72. The steps of the fifth
display control processing are as follows.
[0811] First, the CPU 71 changes a rotation speed of a reel
targeted for control (step S7211). In a case where two reels
targeted for control exist, one reel targeted for control is
maintained at a normal rotation speed, whereas the other reel
targeted for control is set at a speed that is different from the
normal rotation speed. By doing this, symbols can be gradually
formed while the reels targeted for control are rotated. In
addition, in a case where three reels targeted for control exist, a
first reel targeted for control is maintained at a normal rotation
speed, a second reel targeted for control is set at a first speed
that is different from the normal rotation speed, and a third reel
targeted for control is set at a second speed that is different
from the normal speed and the first speed. By doing this, symbols
can be gradually formed while the reels targeted for control are
rotated.
[0812] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not there exist reels
targeted for control on which symbols have been formed in a
horizontal direction (step S7213). This determination is made by a
reel targeted for control, which is rotating at a normal rotation
speed, and by a reel targeted for control, which is rotating at a
rotation speed that is different from the normal rotation speed.
Whether or not symbols have been formed in a horizontal direction
can be determined with the use of numbers for identifying the
symbols. When the CPU 71 determines that there do not exist reels
targeted for control on which symbols have been formed in a
horizontal direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert
to step S7213.
[0813] On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines that there
exist reels targeted for control on which symbols have been formed
in a horizontal direction (YES), a rotation speed of a reel
targeted for control, which is rotating at a rotation speed that is
different from a normal speed, is reset to the normal speed from
among the reels targeted for control on which the symbols have been
formed (step S7215). By doing this, the reels targeted for control
can be continuously rotated at the normal rotation speed while the
state in which the symbols have been formed is maintained.
[0814] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not symbols have been
formed in a horizontal direction as to all of the reels targeted
for control (step S7217). When the CPU 71 determines that the
symbols have not been formed in the horizontal direction as to all
of the reels targeted for control (NO), the CPU 71 causes the
routine to revert to step S7213.
[0815] On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines that the
symbols have been formed in the horizontal direction as to all of
the reels targeted for control (YES), the rotations of all of the
reels targeted for control are gradually slowed down (step
S7219).
[0816] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not all of the reels
targeted for control have stopped (step S7221). When the CPU 71
determines that all of the reels targeted for control have not
stopped yet (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7219. On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines that all of
the reels targeted for control have stopped (YES), the CPU 71
completes this subroutine.
[0817] In this way, symbols are formed in the horizontal direction
while the plurality of reels targeted for control are rotated,
whereby a player visually recognize an appearance that the symbols
are gradually formed to thus able to enhance a player's sense of
expectation.
[0818] <<Sixth Display Control Processing>>
[0819] FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of sixth display
control processing. This subroutine is selected in the processing
operation of step S6615 in FIG. 66 and then the selected subroutine
is invoked and executed in step S6727 of FIG. 67.
[0820] The sixth display control processing is a processing
operation relating to rotation control and stop control of a reel
having started rotation, as triggered by the fact that a player has
operated a spin button 602.
[0821] <Outline of Sixth Display Control Processing>
[0822] When a player has pressed a spin button 602, a first reel
M3a, a third reel M3c, and a fifth reel M3e rotate in a forward
direction and then a second reel M3b and a fourth reel M3d rotate
in a backward direction. After that, wild symbols stop in
sequential order of the second reel M3b and the fourth reel M3d and
then stop slowly tantalizingly in sequential order of the first
reel M3a, the third reel M3c, and the fifth reel M3e.
[0823] The wild symbol used herein is a symbol having a function of
enabling a current symbol with any of symbols that are used in a
gaming machine 300, and in particular, is a symbol that can be
replaced so that a game result is advantageous to a player.
[0824] A specific movement will be described with reference to FIG.
86 (a) and FIG. 86 (b). When a player has pressed a spin button
602, the first reel M3a, the third reel M3c, and the fifth reel M3e
rotate in a forward direction and then the second reel M3b and the
fourth reel M3d rotate in a backward direction (FIG. 86 (a)). In
FIG. 86 (a), the downward arrow indicates a reel rotating in the
forward direction, and the upward arrow indicates a reel rotating
in the backward direction.
[0825] After that, the second reel M3b stops, and a wild symbol
"WILD" is displayed in a stopped state; and then, the fourth reel
M3d stops, and a wild symbol "WILD" is displayed in a stopped state
(FIG. 86 (b)).
[0826] After that, the first reel M3a stops slowing while slowing
down its rotation speed. Next, the third reel M3c stops slowly
while slowing down its rotation speed. Lastly, the fifth reel M3e
stops slowly while slowing down its rotation speed.
[0827] <Steps of Sixth Display Control Processing>
[0828] Specifically, sixth display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 73. The sixth display
control processing is as follows.
[0829] First, the CPU 71 rotates a first reel M3a, a third reel
M5c, and a fifth reel M3e in a forward direction and then rotates a
second reel M3 and a fourth reel M3d in a backward direction, in
the processing operations of steps S6615 and S6617 of FIG. 66
described above.
[0830] It is preferable that the reel rotation processing be as
follows. As described above, wild symbols "WILD" are determined to
be displayed in a stopped state on the second reel M3b and the
fourth reel M3d in accordance with the combination determination
processing of S8. Therefore, among the five reels of the first to
fifth reels M3a to M3e, it is determined whether or not there
exists a reel allowing a wild symbol "WILD" to be displayed in a
stopped state on a winning line. Among the five reels of the first
reel M3a to the fifth reel M3e, when it is determined that there
exists a reel allowing a wild symbol "WILD" to be displayed in a
stopped state on a winning line, the reel allowing the wild symbol
"WILD" to be displayed in a stopped state is rotated in a backward
direction and then a reel disallowing a wild symbol "WILD" to be
displayed in a stopped state is rotated in a backward direction. By
doing this, the reel allowing the wild symbol "WILD" to be
displayed in a stopped state can always be rotated in the backward
direction. These processing operations can be executed in the
processing operations of steps S6615 and S6617 in FIG. 66 described
above.
[0831] Next, the CPU 71 stops the second reel M3b with a
predetermined timing, for example after a predetermined period of
time has elapsed after reel rotation has been started (step
S7311).
[0832] Next, the CPU 71 stops the fourth reel M3d with a
predetermined timing, for example, after a predetermined period of
time has elapsed after step S7311 has been executed (S7313).
[0833] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not wild symbols
"WILD" have been displayed in a stopped state on both of the second
reel M3b and the fourth reel M3d that have been stopped (step
S7315).
[0834] When the CPU 71 determines that the wild symbols "WILD" have
been displayed in a stopped state on both of the second reel M3b
and the fourth reel M3d that have been stopped (YES), a rotation
speed of the first reel M3a is gradually slowed down (step
S7317).
[0835] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the first reel
M3a has stopped (step S7319). When the CPU 71 determines that the
first reel M3a has not stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to revert to step S7317.
[0836] When the CPU 71 determines that the first reel M3a has
stopped (YES), a rotation speed of the third reel M3c is gradually
slowed down (step S7321).
[0837] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the third reel
M3e has stopped (step S7323). When the CPU 71 determines that the
third reel M3c has not stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to revert to step S7321.
[0838] When the CPU 71 determines that the third reel M3c has
stopped (YES), a rotation speed of the fifth reel M3e is gradually
slowed down (step S7325).
[0839] Next, the CPU71 determines whether or not the fifth reel M3e
has stopped (step S7327). When the CPU 71 determines that the fifth
reel M3e has not stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to
revert to step S7325.
[0840] When the CPU 71 determines that the fifth reel M3e has
stopped (YES), the CPU 71 completes this subroutine.
[0841] When the CPU 71 determines that wild symbols "WILD" have not
been displayed in a stopped state on both of the second reel M3b
and the fourth reel M3d that have been stopped, in the
determination processing of step S7315 described above (NO), the
CPU 71 stops the first reel M3a, the third reel M3c, and the fifth
reel M3e in a normal mode (a first mode) (step S7329) and then
completes this subroutine.
[0842] By doing this, rotation directions of the five reels first
rotate alternately differently, thus enabling a player to be
surprised and to expect what happens next. Further, a wild symbol
is displayed in a stopped state to be thus able to enhance a sense
of expectation. Lastly, the reels are stopped slowly to be thus
able to bring a player into a tense atmosphere and attract the
player's interest to reel movement from start of rotation to symbol
rearrangement.
[0843] <<Seventh Display Control Processing>>
[0844] FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of seventh
display control processing. This subroutine is selected in the
processing operation of step S6615 in FIG. 66 and then the selected
subroutine is invoked and executed in step S6617.
[0845] The seventh display control processing is a processing
operation relating to rotation control and stop control of a reel
having started rotation as triggered by the fact that a player has
operated a spin button 602.
[0846] <Outline of Seventh Display Control Processing>
[0847] When a player has pressed a spin button 602, symbols on a
first reel M3a, a second reel M3b, a third reel M3c, a fourth reel
M3d, and a fifth reel M3e are shifted slowly for 0.5 second up to a
position beneath a half frame. After that, immediately after the
symbols have been shifted to the position beneath a half frame, all
of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e rotate at a high speed at
the same time.
[0848] The "one frame" described above is referred to as an
interval of a minimum unit of a position at which symbols can stop,
and is also referred to as an interval of the adjacent positions at
which symbols can stop along a movement direction (a rotation
direction) of a reel M3 when the reel has stopped. For example,
this interval is referred to as an interval of winning lines that
are adjacent to each other along the movement direction (the
rotation direction) of the reel. More specifically, when three
winning lines are set at the upper, middle, and lower stages, an
interval between the upper and middle stages or an interval between
the middle and lower stages becomes one frame. Therefore, the "half
frame" described above is referred to as an interval that is half
of one frame, and a position of the "half frame" is referred to as
an intermediate position between the upper stage and the middle
stage or an intermediate position between the middle stage and the
lower stage.
[0849] A specific movement will be described with reference to FIG.
87 (a) to FIG. 87 (c). Until a player has pressed a spin button
602, a symbol "BAR" is displayed in a stopped state on the first
reel M3a; a symbol "7" is displayed in a stopped state on the
second reel M3b; a bonus symbol "O" is displayed in a stopped state
on the third reel M3c; a symbol 7 is displayed in a stopped state
on the fourth reel M3d; and a bonus symbol "O" is displayed in a
stopped state on the fifth reel M3e (FIG. 87 (a)).
[0850] Next, when the player presses the spin button 602, the
symbol "BAR" on the first reel M3s, the symbol "7" on the second
reel M3b, the bonus symbol "O" on the third reel M3c, the symbol
"7" on the fourth reel M3d, and the bonus symbol "O" on the fifth
reel M3e move for 0.5 second up to beneath a half frame in a
forward direction (in a downward direction) (FIG. 87 (b)).
[0851] Next, after these symbols have been moved up to the position
beneath a half frame, the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e start
rotation at the same time in a backward direction (an upward
direction). After that, the reels rotate at a rotation speed that
is faster than a normal rotation speed (FIG. 87 (c)).
[0852] <Steps of Seventh Display Control Processing>
[0853] Specifically, seventh display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 74. The seventh display
control processing is as follows.
[0854] First, the CPU 71 rotates the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth
reel M3e in a forward direction at a rotation speed that is slower
than a normal rotation speed (step S7411).
[0855] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not symbols on the
first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth
reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have moved up to the position
beneath a half frame (step S7413).
[0856] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel
M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have not moved up to the position
beneath a half frame (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert
to step S7413.
[0857] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel
M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have moved up to the position beneath a
half frame (YES), the CPU 71 stops the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth
reel M3e (step S7415).
[0858] Next, the CPU 71 rotates the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel
M3e at a rotation speed that is faster than a normal rotation speed
(step S7417) and then completes this subroutine.
[0859] First, these reels are rotated slowly and then are rotated
in a backward direction, thus enabling a player to be surprised and
to bring a player into a tense atmosphere, and slow and fast speed
rendering can be provided to the player.
[0860] <<Eighth Display Control Processing>>
[0861] FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of eighth
display control processing. This subroutine is selected in the
processing operation of step S6615 in FIG. 66 and then the selected
subroutine is invoked and executed in step S6727 of FIG. 67.
[0862] The eighth display control processing is a processing
operation relating to rotation control and stop control of a reel
having started rotation as triggered by the fact that a player has
operated a spin button 602.
[0863] <Outline of Eighth Display Control Processing>
[0864] All reels rotate for two second at a normal rotation speed.
After that, all the reels form symbols in a horizontal direction
while rotating at a rotation speed that is faster than the normal
rotation speed. After the symbols have been formed in the
horizontal direction, all the reels rotate tantalizingly for a
while at a rotation speed that is slower than the normal rotation
speed. Lastly, all the reels rotate after rotating at the rotation
speed that is slower than the normal rotation speed. In place of
rotating at the rotation speed that is slower than the normal
rotation speed, all the reels may stop so as to rotate by means of
frame-feeding.
[0865] The frame feeding used herein designates an operation of
rotating a reel in a stepwise manner so as to advance on a one by
one frame basis every 0.5 second, for example. One frame is
referred to as an interval of a minimum unit at a position at which
symbols can stop, and is also referred to as an interval of the
adjacent positions at which symbols can stop along a movement
direction (a rotation direction) of a reel M3. For example, this
interval is referred to as an interval of the adjacent winning
lines along a reel movement direction (a rotation direction). More
specifically, when three winning lines exist at the upper, middle,
and lower stages, an interval between the upper stage and the
middle stage or an interval between the middle stage and the lower
stage becomes one frame.
[0866] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 88 (a) to FIG. 88 (d). When a player presses a spin button 602
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e start rotation in a forward
direction at the same time (FIG. 88 (a)).
[0867] After that, when two seconds have elapsed after rotation has
started, while the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e rotate at a
rotation speed that is slower than a normal rotation speed,
rotation speeds of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e each
are adjusted so that symbols are formed along a horizontal
direction (FIG. 88 (b)).
[0868] After that, predetermined symbols, for example, symbols
"BAR" have been formed in the horizontal direction, the rotation
speeds of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are identical to
each other and then these reels each rotate at the rotation speed
that is slower than the normal rotation speed (FIG. 88 (c)).
[0869] After that, the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are
stopped at the same time so that predetermined symbols, for
example, symbols "7" are displayed in a stopped state (FIG. 88
(d)).
[0870] When predetermined symbols, for example, symbols "BAR" are
formed in a horizontal direction, the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth
reel M3e may be rotated in a stepwise manner so as to make
frame-feeding. As described above, frame-feeding is an operation of
rotating reels in a stepwise manner so as to advance on a one by
one frame basis every 0.5 second, for example. After frame-feeding
has been made, the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are stopped
at the same time so that predetermined symbols are displayed in a
stopped state (FIG. 88 (d)).
[0871] <Steps of Eighth Display Control Processing>
[0872] Specifically, eighth display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 75. The eighth display
control processing is as follows.
[0873] The CPU 71 rotates the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b,
the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e in
a forward direction at a normal rotation speed in the processing
operations of steps S6613 and S6617 in FIG. 66 described above.
[0874] First, the CPU 71 determines whether or not two seconds have
elapsed from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel
M3e (step S7511).
[0875] When the CPU 71 determines that two seconds have not elapsed
from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e (NO),
the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step S7511.
[0876] When the CPU 71 determines that two seconds have elapsed
from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e (YES),
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are rotated at a rotation
speed that is faster than a normal rotation speed (step S7513).
[0877] Next, the CPU 71 changes a rotation speed of the second reel
M3b while maintaining a rotation speed of the first reel M3a at the
rotation speed that is faster than the normal rotation speed (step
s7515).
[0878] Next, the CPU 71 determine whether or not a symbol on the
first reel M3a and a symbol on the second reel M3b have been formed
in a horizontal direction (step S7517). Whether or not symbols have
been formed in the horizontal direction can be determined with the
use of numbers for identifying the symbols. When the CPU 71
determined that no symbols have been formed in the horizontal
direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to
S7517.
[0879] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols have been formed
in the horizontal direction (YES), the CPU 71 changes the rotation
speed of the second reel M3b to a rotation speed that is identical
to the rotation speed of the first reel M3a (step S7519).
[0880] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbols on
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have been formed in the
horizontal direction (step S7521).
[0881] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols of the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel
M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have not been formed in the horizontal
direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7515.
[0882] When the routine has reverted to step S7515, the CPU 71
executes the processing operations in steps S7515 to S7517 and then
changes a rotation speed of the third reel M3c so that the symbol
on the first reel M3a and the symbol on the third reel M3c are
formed in the horizontal direction while maintaining the rotation
speed of the first reel M3a at a rotation speed that is faster than
the normal rotation speed. Further, the steps S7515 to S7517 are
repeated so as to thereby form the symbol on the first reel M3a and
the symbol on the fourth reel M3d in the horizontal direction and
then form the symbol on the first reel M3a and the symbol on the
fifth reel M3e in the horizontal direction. By repeating the
processing operations in this way, the symbols on the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d,
and the fifth reel M3e can be formed in the horizontal
direction.
[0883] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the
first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth
reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have been formed in the horizontal
direction (YES), the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are rotate at
a rotation speed that is slower than the normal rotation speed
(step S7523).
[0884] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined
period of time has elapsed (step S7525). When the CPU 71 determines
that the predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU
71 causes the routine to revert to step S7525.
[0885] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (NO), the rotation speed of the first reel M3a,
the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and
the fifth reel M3e is gradually slowed down (step S7527).
[0886] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d,
and the fifth reel M3e have stopped (step S7529). When the CPU 71
determines that the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have not
stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7529.
[0887] When the CPU 71 determines that the first reel M3a, the
second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the
fifth reel M3e have stopped (YES), the CPU 71 completes this
subroutine.
[0888] By doing this, symbols are gradually formed while the reels
rotate to be thus able to attract a player's interest to reel
movement and give a sense of expectation to the player until symbol
rearrangement has completed.
[0889] <<Ninth Display Control Processing>>
[0890] FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of ninth display
control processing. This subroutine is selected in the processing
operation of step S6615 in FIG. 66 and then the selected subroutine
is invoked and executed in step S6727 of FIG. 67.
[0891] All reels rotate for two second at a normal rotation speed.
After that, all the reels form symbols in a horizontal direction
while rotating at a rotation speed that is faster than the normal
rotation speed. After the symbols have been formed in the
horizontal direction, all the reels rotate tantalizingly for a
while at a rotation speed that is slower than the normal rotation
speed. Lastly, all the reels rotate after rotating at the rotation
speed that is slower than the normal rotation speed. In place of
rotating at the rotation speed that is slower than the normal
rotation speed, all the reels may stop so as to rotate by means of
frame-feeding.
[0892] The frame feeding used herein designates an operation of
rotating a reel in a stepwise manner so as to advance on a one by
one frame basis every 0.5 second, for example. One frame is
referred to as an interval of a minimum unit at a position at which
symbols can stop, and is also referred to as an interval of the
adjacent positions at which symbols can stop along a movement
direction (a rotation direction) of a reel M3. For example, this
interval is referred to as an interval of the adjacent winning
lines along a reel movement direction (a rotation direction). More
specifically, when three winning lines exist at the upper, middle,
and lower stages, an interval between the upper stage and the
middle stage or an interval between the middle stage and the lower
stage becomes one frame.
[0893] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 89 (a) to FIG. 89 (d). When a player presses a spin button 602
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e start rotation in a forward
direction at the same time (FIG. 89 (a)).
[0894] After that, when two seconds have elapsed after rotation has
started, while the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e rotate at a
rotation speed that is slower than a normal rotation speed,
rotation speeds of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e each
are adjusted so that symbols are formed along a horizontal
direction (FIG. 89 (b)).
[0895] After that, predetermined symbols, for example, symbols
"BAR" have been formed in the horizontal direction, the rotation
speeds of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are identical to
each other and then these reels each rotate at the rotation speed
that is slower than the normal rotation speed (FIG. 89 (c)).
[0896] After that, the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are
stopped at the same time so that predetermined symbols, for
example, symbols "7" are displayed in a stopped state (FIG. 89
(d)).
[0897] When predetermined symbols, for example, symbols "BAR" are
formed in a horizontal direction, the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth
reel M3e may be rotated in a stepwise manner so as to make
frame-feeding. As described above, frame-feeding is an operation of
rotating reels in a stepwise manner so as to advance on a one by
one frame basis every 0.5 second, for example. After frame-feeding
has been made, the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e are stopped
at the same time so that predetermined symbols are displayed in a
stopped state (FIG. 89 (d)).
[0898] <Steps of Ninth Display Control Processing>
[0899] Specifically, ninth display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 76. The ninth display
control processing is as follows.
[0900] The CPU 71 rotates the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b,
the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e in
a forward direction at a normal rotation speed in the processing
operations of steps S6613 and S6617 in FIG. 66 described above.
[0901] First, the CPU 71 determines whether or not two seconds have
elapsed from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel
M3e (step S7611).
[0902] When the CPU 71 determines that two seconds have not elapsed
from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e (NO),
the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step S7611.
[0903] When the CPU 71 determines that two seconds have elapsed
from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e (YES),
the CPU 71 rotates the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e at a
rotation speed that is faster than a normal rotation speed (step
S7613).
[0904] Next, the CPU 71 changes a rotation speed of the second reel
M3b while maintaining a rotation speed of the first reel M3a at the
rotation speed that is faster than the normal rotation speed (step
s7615).
[0905] Next, the CPU 71 determine whether or not a symbol on the
first reel M3a and a symbol on the second reel M3b have been formed
in a horizontal direction (step S7617). Whether or not symbols have
been formed in the horizontal direction can be determined with the
use of numbers for identifying the symbols. When the CPU 71
determined that no symbols have been formed in the horizontal
direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to
S7617.
[0906] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols have been formed
in the horizontal direction (YES), the CPU 71 changes the rotation
speed of the second reel M3b to a rotation speed that is identical
to the rotation speed of the first reel M3a (step S7619).
[0907] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbols on
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have been formed in the
horizontal direction (step S7621).
[0908] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols of the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel
M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have not been formed in the horizontal
direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7615.
[0909] When the routine has reverted to step S7615, the CPU 71
executes the processing operations in steps S7615 to S7617 and then
changes a rotation speed of the third reel M3c so that the symbol
on the first reel M3a and the symbol on the third reel M3c are
formed in the horizontal direction while maintaining the rotation
speed of the first reel M3a at a rotation speed that is faster than
the normal rotation speed. Further, the steps S7615 to S7617 are
repeated so as to thereby form the symbol on the first reel M3a and
the symbol on the fourth reel M3d in the horizontal direction and
then form the symbol on the first reel M3a and the symbol on the
fifth reel M3e in the horizontal direction. By repeating the
processing operations in this way, the symbols on the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d,
and the fifth reel M3e can be formed in the horizontal
direction.
[0910] Next, when the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the
first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth
reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have been formed in the horizontal
direction (YES), the CPU 71 rotates the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth
reel M3e at a rotation speed that is slower than the normal
rotation speed (step S7623).
[0911] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined
period of time has elapsed (step S7625). When the CPU 71 determines
that the predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU
71 causes the routine to revert to step S7625.
[0912] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (NO), the rotation speed of the first reel M3a,
the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and
the fifth reel M3e is gradually slowed down (step S7627).
[0913] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d,
and the fifth reel M3e have stopped (step S7629). When the CPU 71
determines that the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have not
stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7629.
[0914] When the CPU 71 determines that the first reel M3a, the
second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the
fifth reel M3e have stopped (YES), the CPU 71 completes this
subroutine.
[0915] By doing this, symbols are gradually formed while the reels
rotate to be thus able to attract a player's interest to reel
movement and give a sense of expectation to the player until symbol
rearrangement has completed.
[0916] <<Tenth Display Control Processing>>
[0917] FIG. 77 and FIG. 78 are flowcharts showing a subroutine of
tenth display control processing. This subroutine is selected in
the processing operation of step S6615 in FIG. 66 and then the
selected subroutine is invoked and executed in step S6727 of FIG.
67.
[0918] The tenth display control processing is a processing
operation relating to rotation control and stop control of a reel
having started rotation as triggered by the fact that a player has
operated a spin button 602.
[0919] <Outline of Tenth Display Control Processing>
[0920] All reels rotate for two second at a normal rotation speed.
After that, symbols are formed in a horizontal direction while all
the reels rotate at a rotation speed that is slower than the normal
rotation speed. After the symbols on three symbols have been formed
in the horizontal direction, in a case where symbols on four reels
have not been formed in the horizontal direction, the remaining
reels stop slowly as they are. In a case where the symbols on four
reels have been formed in the horizontal direction, the symbols on
the four reels are formed in the horizontal direction while the
reels rotate at a rotation speed that is slower than the normal
rotation speed. In a case where symbols on five reels have not been
formed in the horizontal direction the remaining reels stop slowly
as they are. In a case where symbols on five reels have been formed
in the horizontal direction, the symbols on the five reels are
formed in the horizontal direction while the reels rotate at a
rotation speed that is slower than the normal rotation speed. After
the symbols on the five reels have been formed in the horizontal
direction, the reels stop slowly tantalizingly.
[0921] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 90 (a) to FIG. 90 (d). When a player presses a spin button
602, a first reel M3a, a second reel M3b, a third reel M3c, a
fourth reel M3d, and a fifth reel M3e start rotation in a forward
direction at the same time (FIG. 90 (a)).
[0922] After that, when two seconds have elapsed after the reels
have started rotation, while the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel
M3e rotate, a rotation speed of on the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, and the third reel M3e each is adjusted so that symbols
on the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, and the third reel M3c
are formed along a horizontal direction.
[0923] Then, after the symbols on the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, and the third reel M3c have been formed along the
horizontal direction, while the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel
M3e each are rotated at a rotation speed that is slower than the
normal rotation speed, the rotation speed of the fourth reel M3d is
adjusted so that the symbols on the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, and the fourth reel M3d are formed along
the horizontal direction (FIG. 90 (b)).
[0924] Then, after the symbols on the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, and the fourth reel M3d have been
formed along the horizontal direction, while the first reel M3a,
the second reel M3b, the third reel M3e, the fourth reel M3d, and
the fifth reel M3e each are rotated at a rotation speed that is
slower than the normal rotation speed, the rotation speed of the
fifth reel M3e is adjusted so that the symbols on the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d,
and the fifth reel M3e are formed along the horizontal direction
(FIG. 90 (c)).
[0925] After the symbols on the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel
M3e have been formed along the horizontal direction, the rotation
speed of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e each is gradually
slowed down and the rotation of these reels is stopped (FIG. 90
(d)).
[0926] After the symbols on the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the and third reel M3c have been formed along the horizontal
direction, there may be a case in which the symbols on the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, and the fourth
reel M3d cannot be formed along the horizontal direction for the
convenience of a kind of symbol or an operable time. In this case,
the rotation speed of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e each is
gradually slowed down, and then, rotation of these reels is stopped
and completed.
[0927] Similarly, after the symbols on the first reel M3a, the
second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, and the fourth reel M3d have
been formed along the horizontal direction, there may be a case in
which the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c,
the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e cannot be formed along
the horizontal direction for the convenience of a kind of symbol or
an operable time. In this case, the rotation speed of the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel
M3d, and the fifth reel M3e each is gradually slowed down, and then
the rotation of these reels is stopped and completed.
[0928] <Steps of Tenth Display Control Processing>
[0929] Specifically, tenth display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 77 and FIG. 78. The tenth
display control processing is as follows.
[0930] The CPU 71 rotates the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b,
the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e in
a forward direction at a normal rotation speed in the processing
operations of steps S6613 and S6617 in FIG. 66 described above.
[0931] First, the CPU 71 determines whether or not two seconds have
elapsed from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel
M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel
M3e (step S7711).
[0932] When the CPU 71 determines that two seconds have not elapsed
from rotation start of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e (NO),
the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step S7711.
[0933] Next, the CPU 71 changes a rotation speed of the second reel
M3b while maintaining a rotation speed of the first reel M3a at the
rotation speed that is faster than the normal rotation speed (step
S7713).
[0934] Next, the CPU 71 determine whether or not a symbol on the
first reel M3a and a symbol on the second reel M3b have been formed
in a horizontal direction (step S7715). Whether or not symbols have
been formed in the horizontal direction can be determined with the
use of numbers for identifying the symbols. When the CPU 71
determined that no symbols have been formed in the horizontal
direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to
S7715.
[0935] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols have been formed
in the horizontal direction (YES), the CPU 71 changes the rotation
speed of the second reel M3b to a rotation speed that is identical
to the rotation speed of the first reel M3a (step S7717).
[0936] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbols on
three reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, and the
third reel M3c have been formed in the horizontal direction (step
S7719).
[0937] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the three
reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, and the third
reel M3c have not been formed in the horizontal direction (NO), the
CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step S7713.
[0938] When the routine has reverted to step S7713, the CPU 71
executes the processing operations in steps S7713 to S7717 and then
changes a rotation speed of the third reel M3c so that the symbol
on the first reel M3a and the second reel M3b and the symbol on the
third reel M3c are formed in the horizontal direction while
maintaining the rotation speed of the first reel M3a and the second
reel M3b at the normal rotation speed. By repeating the processing
operations in this way, the symbols on the three reels of the first
reel M3a, the second reel M3b, and the third reel M3c can be formed
in the horizontal direction.
[0939] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not symbols on four
reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, and the fourth reel M3d can be formed in the horizontal
direction (step S7721). For example, there may also be a case in
which the symbols on the four reels cannot be formed in the
horizontal direction for the convenience of a kind of symbols
assigned to the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, and the fourth reel M3d or a time required to form symbols or
the like.
[0940] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the four
reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, and the fourth reel M3d cannot be formed in the horizontal
direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to migrate to step
S7821 to be described later.
[0941] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the four
reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, and the fourth reel M3d can be formed in the horizontal
direction (YES), the CPU 71 changes a rotation speed of the fourth
reel M3d while maintaining a rotation speed of the first reel M3a,
the second reel M3b, and the third reel M3c each at a normal speed
(step S7723).
[0942] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbols on
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, and the third reel M3c and
the symbol on the fourth reel M3d have been formed in the
horizontal direction (step S7725). Whether or not the symbols have
been formed in the horizontal direction can be determined with the
use of number for identifying the symbols. When the CPU 71
determines that the symbols have not been formed in the horizontal
direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7725.
[0943] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols have been formed
in the horizontal direction (YES), the CPU 71 changes the rotation
speed of the fourth reel M3d at a rotation speed that is identical
to a rotation speed of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, and
the third reel M3c each (step S7727). Next, the CPU 71 determines
whether or not the symbols on four reels of the first reel M3a, the
second reel M3b, the third reel M3c and the fourth reel M3d have
been formed in the horizontal direction (step S7729). When the CPU
71 determines that the symbols on the four reels of the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c and the fourth reel
M3d have not been formed in the horizontal direction (NO), the CPU
71 causes the routine to revert to step S7723. When the routine has
reverted to step S7723, the CPU 71 executes the processing
operations in steps S7723 to S7727 and then changes a rotation
speed of the fourth reel M3d so that the symbol on the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b and the third reel M3c and the symbol on
the fourth reel M3d are formed in the horizontal direction while
maintaining the rotation speed of the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b and the third reel M3c at the normal rotation speed. By
repeating the processing operations in this way, the symbols on the
four reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3c and the fourth reel M3d can be formed in the horizontal
direction.
[0944] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbols on
the five reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e can be
formed in the horizontal direction (step S7731). For example, there
may also be a case in which the symbols on the five reels cannot be
formed in the horizontal direction for the convenience of a kind of
symbols assigned to the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e or a
time required for processing operations for forming the symbols,
for example.
[0945] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the five
reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e cannot be formed
in the horizontal direction (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to
revert to step S7821 to be described later.
[0946] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols on the five
reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3e, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e can be formed in
the horizontal direction (YES), the CPU 71 changes the rotation
speed of the fifth reel M3e while maintaining the rotation speed of
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, and
the fourth reel M3d each (step S7811).
[0947] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbols on
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, and
the fourth reel M3d and the symbol on the fifth reel M3e have been
formed in the horizontal direction (step S7813). Whether or not the
symbols have been formed in the horizontal direction can be
determined with numbers for identifying symbols. When the CPU 71
determines that the symbols have not been formed in the horizontal
line (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7813.
[0948] When the CPU 71 determines that the symbols have been formed
in the horizontal direction (YES), the CPU 71 changes the rotation
speed of the fifth reel M3e to a rotation speed that is identical
to a rotation speed of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the
third reel M3c, and the fourth reel M3d each (step S7815). Next,
the CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbols on five reels of
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d and the fifth reel M3e have been formed in the
horizontal direction (step S7817). When the CPU 71 determines that
the symbols on the five reels of the first reel M3a, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d and the fifth
reel M3e have not been formed in the horizontal direction (NO), the
CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step S7811. When the routine
has reverted to step S7811, the CPU 71 executes the processing
operations in steps S7811 to S7815 and then changes a rotation
speed of the fifth reel M3e so that the symbol on the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c and the fourth reel
M3d and the symbol on the fifth reel M3e are formed in the
horizontal direction while maintaining the rotation speed of the
first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c and the
fourth reel M3d at the normal rotation speed. By repeating the
processing operations in this way, the symbols on the five reels of
the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the
fourth reel M3d and the fifth reel M3e can be formed in the
horizontal direction.
[0949] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined
period of time has elapsed (step S7819). When the CPU 71 determines
that the predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU
71 causes the routine to revert to step S7819.
[0950] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 gradually slows down the rotation
speed of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel
M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e each (step
S7821).
[0951] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d,
and the fifth reel M3e each (step S7821). When the CPU 71
determines that the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b, the third
reel M3e, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e have not
stopped (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine to revert to step
S7821.
[0952] When the CPU 71 determines that the first reel M3a, the
second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the
fifth reel M3e have stopped (YES), the CPU 71 completes this
subroutine.
[0953] By doing this, more symbols are gradually formed while the
reels rotate to be thus able to impart a tense atmosphere and a
sense of expectation to a player and attract the player's interest
until symbol rearrangement has completed.
[0954] <<Eleventh Display Control Processing>>
[0955] FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of eleventh
display control processing. This subroutine is selected in the
processing operation of step S6615 in FIG. 66 and then the selected
subroutine is invoked and executed in step S6727 of FIG. 67.
[0956] The eleventh display control processing is a processing
operation relating to rotation control and stop control of a reel
having started rotation as triggered by the fact that a player has
operated a spin button 602.
[0957] <Outline of Eleventh Display Control Processing>
[0958] All reels stop after rotating at a normal rotation speed. A
reel to be nudged shakes vertically slightly. After the reel has
shaken slightly, any action is randomly taken from among an action
of shifting upward on a one by one frame basis, an action of
shifting downward on a one by one frame basis, and an action of
stopping without movement as is.
[0959] The "one frame" described above is referred to as an
interval of a minimum unit of a position at which symbols can stop,
and is also referred to as an interval of the adjacent positions at
which symbols can stop along a movement direction (a rotation
direction) of a reel M3 when the reel has stopped. For example,
this interval is referred to as an interval of winning lines that
are adjacent to each other along the movement direction (the
rotation direction) of the reel. More specifically, when three
winning lines are set at the upper, middle, and lower stages, an
interval between the upper and middle stages or an interval between
the middle and lower stages becomes one frame.
[0960] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 91 (a) to FIG. 91 (c). First, all reels stop after rotating at
a normal rotation speed (FIG. 91 (a)). Next, a reel targeted to be
nudged (a fifth reel M3e) makes fine rotation alternately in a
forward direction (a downward direction) and in a backward
direction (an upward direction) and then shakes slightly (nudging
action) (FIG. 91 (b)). Further, the nudged reel (the fifth reel
M3e) shifts by one frame in the backward direction (the upward
direction) (FIG. 91 (c)) and then completes its nudging action.
[0961] The reel having nudged (the fifth reel M3e) may complete its
rotation after shifting in the forward direction (the downward
direction) (not shown). In addition, the nudged reel (the fifth
reel M3e) may complete the action while stopping without rotation.
Any action of the nudged reel (the fifth reel M3e) may be randomly
determined from among the action of shifting by one frame in the
backward direction (in the upward direction), the action of
shifting by one frame in the forward direction (in the downward
direction), and the action of stopping as is.
[0962] <Steps of Eleventh Display Control Processing>
[0963] Specifically, eleventh display control processing is
executed in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 79. The eleventh
display control processing is as follows.
[0964] The CPU 71 rotates a first reel M3a, a second reel M3b, a
third reel M3c, a fourth reel M3d, and a fifth reel M3e in a
forward direction at a normal rotation speed in the processing
operations of step S6613 and S6617 in FIG. 66 described above.
[0965] First, all rotating reels (the first reel Mia, the second
reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth
reel M3e) are stopped at a predetermined position (step S7911). For
example, these reels are stopped so as to establish a li-zhi.
[0966] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not w predetermined
period of time has elapsed (step S7913). When the CPU 71 determines
that the predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU
71 causes the routine to revert to step S7913.
[0967] Next, the CPU 71 rotates a reel to be nudged at a small
rotation angle in a forward direction and then returns the reel to
its original position (step S7915). It is preferable that the reel
to be nudged be a reel that can be won in the reel is rotated at a
predetermined angle. By doing this, a player can be given a sense
of expectation that a winning prize such as at least a li-zhi may
be won.
[0968] Next, the CPU 71 rotates the reel to be nudged at a small
rotation angle in the forward direction and then returns the reel
to its original position (step S7917). The reel can be nudged by
repeating the processing operations of the steps S7915 and
S7917.
[0969] Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not to complete
nudging (step S7919). For example, the CPU 71 determines whether or
not the number of times of execution of steps S7915 and S7919 has
reached a predetermined number of times. When the CPU 71 determines
that the nudging is not completed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the
routine to revert to step S7915.
[0970] On the other hand, when the CPU 71 determines that the
nudging is completed (YES), the CPU 71 performs lottery processing
to determine whether to shift the nudged reel by one frame in the
backward direction (the upward direction), to shift the nudged reel
by one frame in the forward direction (the downward direction), or
to stop the nudged reel as is (step S7921).
[0971] Next, the CPU 71 executes the action that is determined in
the step S7921 for the nudged reel (step S7923) and then completes
this subroutine.
[0972] By doing this, the reel shakes; and thereby a player is
allowed to expect that the reel having shaken may produce a result
that is advantageous for the player while imparting a tense
atmosphere to the player.
[0973] <<Twelfth Display Control Processing>>
[0974] FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of twelfth
display control processing. This subroutine is selected in the
processing operation of step S6615 in FIG. 66 and then the selected
subroutine is invoked and executed in step S6617.
[0975] The twelfth display control processing is a processing
operation relating to rotation control and stop control of a reel
having started rotation as triggered by the fact that a player has
operated a spin button 602.
[0976] <Outline of Twelfth Display Control Processing>
[0977] When the player presses the spin button 602, a first reel
rotates. After the first reel has rotated, a second reel then
rotates after 0.1 second. A third reel, a fourth reel, and a fifth
reel that remain also rotate in sequential order after 0.1
second.
[0978] A more specific movement will be described with reference to
FIG. 92 (a) to FIG. 92 (c). First, at a time point before the
player presses the spin button 602, all the reels of the first reel
M3a, the second reel M3b, the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d,
and the fifth reel M3e are stopped (FIG. 92 (a)). Next, when the
player presses the spin button 602, rotation of the first reel M3a
is started (FIG. 92 (b)). After 0.1 second has elapsed, rotation of
the second reel M3b is then started (step S92 (c)).
[0979] After 0.1 second has elapsed, rotation of the third reel M3c
is then started; after 0.1 second has elapsed, rotation of the
third reel M3d is then started; and after 0.1 second has elapsed,
rotation of the third reel M3e is then started (not shown).
[0980] <Steps of Twelfth Display Control Processing>
[0981] Specifically, twelfth display control processing is executed
in accordance with a subroutine of FIG. 80. The twelfth display
control processing is as follows.
[0982] First, the CPU 71 starts rotation of the first reel M3a
(step S8011). Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.1 second has elapsed
(step S8013). When the CPU 71 determines that a predetermined
period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU causes the routine to
revert to step S8013.
[0983] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 starts rotation of the second
reel M3b (step S8015). Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.1 second has elapsed
(step S8017). When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined
period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to step S8017.
[0984] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 starts rotation of the second
reel M3c (step S8019). Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.1 second has elapsed
(step S8021). When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined
period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to step S8021.
[0985] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 starts rotation of the fourth
reel M3d (step S8023). Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.1 second has elapsed
(step S8025). When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined
period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to step S8025.
[0986] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 starts rotation of the fifth
reel M3e (step S8027). Next, the CPU 71 determines whether or not a
predetermined period of time, for example, 0.1 second has elapsed
(step S8029). When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined
period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU 71 causes the routine
to step S8029.
[0987] When the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of
time has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 completes this subroutine.
[0988] By doing his, timings of rotation start of reels are
gradually shifted; and therefore, a player can be given a sense of
expectation that a result different from a previous one may be
produced.
Modification Example 1
[0989] The example described above showed a case of selecting a
special rotation mode and then determining both of rotation start
processing and rotation stop processing while an operating button
is operated and reels start rotation by executing the processing
operation of step S6615. In contrast, selection of the specific
rotation mode relating to rotation stop processing may be executed
immediately before starting rotation stop control. For example,
when it is determined that reels are not normally stopped in the
determination processing of step S6711 in FIG. 67 (NO), a special
stop mode may be selected. When an attempt is made to do this, any
one display control processing may be determined by means of
lottery processing from among the sixth display control processing,
the eighth display control processing, the ninth display control
processing, the tenth display control processing, and the eleventh
display control processing, relating to rotation stop processing.
By doing this, a special stop mode can be appropriately selected at
a stage of rotation stop and then an interesting special rotation
mode can be selected according to the processing of a game.
Modification Example 2
[0990] While the example described above showed a case of advancing
a unit game with the use of five mechanical reels (the first reel
M3a to the fifth reel M3e) that are mechanically actuated, a video
reel image may be displayed on an image display panel with the use
of the image display panel using an upper image display panel 131
in place of the mechanical reels. In the case of the mechanical
reels or video reels, the mechanical reels or the video reels form
a "scroll line". In the case where the image display panel is used,
no video reel needs to be displayed. In this case, while a player
cannot visually recognize a scroll line, symbols may be displayed
so as to move along a predetermined scroll line.
Fourth Embodiment
[0991] The first embodiment described above showed a gaming machine
that is capable of achieving reel control in an analog manner. In
addition, the second embodiment showed a gaming machine that is
capable of achieving reel control in a digital manner. Further, the
third embodiment showed a gaming machine that is capable of
achieving a variety of modes relating to rotation control and stop
control of five reels of the first reel M3a, the second reel M3b,
the third reel M3c, the fourth reel M3d, and the fifth reel M3e in
the gaming machine of the first embodiment and the second
embodiment. A fourth embodiment can be applied to the gaming
machine that is capable of achieving reel control in an analog
manner (the first embodiment), the gaming machine that is capable
of achieving reel control in a digital manner (the second
embodiment), or the gaming machine that is capable of achieving a
variety of modes relating to rotation control and stop control (the
third embodiment). Therefore, a mechanical structure or hardware
configuration of a gaming machine in the fourth embodiment is
identical to that in the first embodiment, the second embodiment,
or the third embodiment. Programs for executing a processing
operation that is shown in a flowchart shown in FIG. 81 to be
described later are stored in advance in a ROM 72 (FIG. 38) of the
first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment,
and values such as variables required when the programs have been
executed are stored in a RAM 73 (FIG. 38).
[0992] The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is
directed to a gaming machine for executing a unit game in which a
prize is determined based on rearranged symbols, and includes: a
display having a display region configured to display symbols
associated with each of a plurality of scroll lines (such as the
display window 150 described above, for example);
[0993] a backlight configured to illuminate the display (such as
the backlight device M7 described above, for example);
[0994] a spin button that can be operated by a player, for
outputting an operating signal indicating that an operation has
been made when the spin button has been operated by the player (for
example, the spin button 602 described above);
[0995] an indicator configured to display a degree of expectation
indicating a possibility that the unit game is advantageous (such
as the expectation value meter 160 described above, for example);
and
[0996] a controller (such as the CPU 71 described above, for
example) for controlling the indicator based on the fact that the
operating signal has been received, the controller being programmed
to execute processing operations of:
[0997] (1-9-1) turning off the backlight as triggered by the fact
that the operating signal has been received (such as step S9311 to
be described later, for example);
[0998] (1-9-2) generating the degree of expectation from a progress
of the unit game as triggered by the fact that the operating signal
has been received (such as step S9313 to be described later, for
example); and
[0999] (1-9-3) transmitting to the indicator a control signal
adapted to control the indicator in accordance with the degree of
expectation (such as step S9315 to be described later, for
example).
[1000] <<Expectation Value Meter Lighting Control
Processing>>
[1001] FIG. 93 is a subroutine showing a processing operation of
expectation value meter lighting control.
[1002] First, the CPU 71 turns off a backlight device M7 configured
to illuminate five reels M3a to M3e (step S9311). By doing this,
the backlight device M7 can be turned off as triggered by the fact
that a player has operated a spin button 602 (step S4 of FIG. 47).
By turning off the backlight device M7, a difference from a normal
unit game can be indicated for the player. In addition, a degree of
expectation by a backlight 164 to be described later can be easily
visually recognized.
[1003] Next, the CPU 71 computes a degree of expectation (step
S9313). The degree of expectation may be an item of information
indicating a possibility that a unit game is advantageous.
[1004] For example, the degree of expectation includes an
expectation value or the like indicating a possibility of winning a
prize such as a bonus. In the case of the expectation value, if a
probability of winning a prize such as a bonus is 1/300, a
possibility of winning a prize increases as the number of unit
games continuously failing to win a prize is close to 300 times.
The expectation value is computed from the number of unit games
continuously failing to win a prize and a probability of winning a
prize.
[1005] In addition, the degree of expectation may be an item of
information relating to a prize that a player can acquire. A prize
having a possibility of being awarded by a player continuously
playing a unit game may be computed based on a prize to be awarded
for each winning prize and a probability of winning a prize or the
like.
[1006] Next, the CPU 71 transmits to the backlight 164 a control
signal adapted to control a color of light that is emitted from a
full-color LED of the backlight 164 or a light emitting region in
accordance with the degree of expectation that is computed in step
S9313 (step S9315). As described above, in a case where the
full-color LED is made of a plurality of LED elements, the light
emitting region can be determined in accordance with the number of
LED elements adapted to emit light.
[1007] Next, the CPU determines whether or not a predetermined
period of time has elapsed (step S9317). When the CPU 71 determines
that the predetermined period of time has not elapsed (NO), the CPU
71 causes the routine to revert to step S9317. On the other hand,
when the CPU 71 determines that the predetermined period of time
has elapsed (YES), the CPU 71 turns on the backlight device M7
(step S9319) and then completes this subroutine.
[1008] By executing the subroutine described above, the degree of
expectation by the backlight 164 can be indicated for a player as
triggered by the fact that the player has operated the spin button
602 (step S4 of FIG. 47). By doing this, the player's interest can
be enhanced from the start of a unit game in which the spin button
602 has been operated.
[1009] In addition, after the backlight 164 has been turned on in
accordance with the processing operation of step S9315, after a
predetermined period of time has elapsed, the backlight 164 may be
turned off. The player's interest can be returned to symbol
movement by turning off the backlight 164.
* * * * *